,
,
Active, Passive & Impersonal Constructions of Classical Sanskrit
. Nilotpala Gandhi
~~~~-.----------.~-
As a teacher, I cc .,,'.-
some what different Language studies. S~ trained in the descipli One fine day he me for being her gu with me doing the Sulekhakllmar from Makwana. I accepte· of hard·working and the subject is to be e students who can w( good marks in M.A. gold medals and a ~
Published by : Nilotpala Gandhi 30, Shivali Apts. Nr. Law Garden, Ellisbridge, Ahmedabad:6.
she was outstandin! Nilotpala had
u
got the Junior Rese~ She spent her full tim from 10-30 to 5-30 [ to study Sanskrit Gn
Price: Rs. 50-00
Manjusha' along w thorouguly. "
Printed by: .' '., ·.;.X· Bhikhalal Bhavsar
She started to !
···;,;R~rji~(i~hna Comput~C$
':3': Vijay House,
. classical Sanskrit.
.
sentenc'as, as whc
mo~i3~~i~r.,c~
'Nava Vadaj, Ahmedabad-380013.: .'
them which were rei Published by Gujarat University with the'.ijiid of U.G.C., New Delhi .
';'~i""
::
:~-..;.
-.. .
Foreword As a teacher, I could see that Nilofpala was hard·working, studious and some what different amongst other students. She had a deep insight in
,,,- ...-
Language studies. She was a graduate from M. S. University, Baroda and was trained in the descipline by Dr. Mahulkar. That training also helped her a lot. One fine day her father Justice Gheewala came to me and proposed me for being her guide for Ph.D. in Linguistics. There were four students with me doing their Ph.D.• Mr. Mallikarjunam from Banglore, Mrs. Sulekhakumar from Bhopal, Mr. Rajguru from Madurai and Mr. Manubhai Makwana. I accepted the proposal immediately because there is a scarcity \: .,-
of hard-working and intelligent students in the field of language studies. I~ the subject is to be established, there must be a team of genuine interested students who can work hard for a long time in the subject. She had obtained good marks in M.A. with Sanskrit Grammar and Linguistics and won three gold medals and a prize. Even while doing her P. G. Diploma in Linguistics she was outstanding. Nilotpala had understoodthe discipline of research very quickly. She gotthe Junior Research fellowship from the U.G.C. and started the research.
f'"
She spent her full time after research. She remained present in the department from 10-30 to 5-30 Dr. Arvind Bhandari and myself also got a good chance to study Sanskrit Grammar with her. We studied 'VaiyakaraQa-ParamalaghuManjusha' along with the Case Grammar and the Functional Grammar, thorouguly. She started to .gatherAciive,passi\l@andlm~~'r;dh~f:sentences from .'., . ~
".'
literaur~.
classical Sanskrit .,.,."
"
...,...."
"
noted'dtJw~~lf'the
facts about these
l>ent!'l~C~s as. who says, to whom, in W,hich contE:!xt and with which motila~t11J~~sr.coliecting a good data she selected some sentences from ".,
.c., New Delhi .".
She
~~
"Ii~J""
.
"
" "-
.-.
"
them which wer~'relevant~MJd useful to her study and then started to analyse "
.
.
. . . ...
.
(iii)
and interprete them. After passing through all these procedures she started to design and put her findings in natural course. One can see hbw gracefully the language is used and how elegantly the thesis is presented by a young
I have carried than a decade ba
girl who has just·passed her M.A. Examinations.
suggestions made some thoughts wh
Prof. A. S. Anantanarayana (former President of Linguistic Society of
them. I think that e
India, a great scholar of Sanskrit· and' the head of the Advanced centre in.
is a preparation fOI
Linguistics, Osmanr~ University, Hyderabad) was one of the. experts cif this
the race of the aCe
thesis and he greatly admired the thesis. He made some valua,ble suggestions
it is a problem-find
which are incorporated.
As we know, It explored much anc
This thesis is a valuable contribution in the field 'of Sanskrit and Linguistics. It is good to know that she is preparing this book.in Gujarati,
said with regard to
I: "
understood and p
too. I strongly believe that one should produce books in one's own mother-
examined the pari
tongue. He is not a scholar uptill he enriches his mother-tongue by his lot~
depth, the width
0:
of books in English which do not reach to the
thesis as an interdi
fellow native speakers. I am glad to know that she has started translating
theories say about
the book in GujaratL'She .has Prove9 herself as a successful teacher in this
mUlti-dimensions.
·field. I feel very proud introducing Nilotpala with this thesis to the academic
Many people
knowledge. There are
~
in progress. It is nc
scholarly world. May God bless her!
I take this opportur . Dr. Yogendra Vyas
Wishing her a brilliant scholarly future, health and a warm happy family life!
Ahmedabad), who: stages of the prepa sense of gratitude tl
Dr. Yogendra Vyas
347, Saraswatinagar,
University, Ahrneq~
:'.c~~·~':.r1~:::i
. ':.,'-',
Ahmedabad-3E\0015.
"
and whol.)ng(udgiri ~'l\.-
"
.•_•• ,''''''.
'.
to;Df;lI:(M. Mahulk
"
:./~~r~da),
,-.
--"-
who shm
linguistic way. I alsl who had inculcated my thanks are due valuable assistanci
(iv)
'"
.
Preface
dures she started ee how gracefully
I have carried out this research at a tender age, in the 80S i.e. more than a decade back. I have not added or altered anything except the
ented bya young
suggestions made by the refrees.1 wanted to publish it as it was. There are some thoughts which need more investigations, but I have not changed guistic Society of
them. I think that a Ph.D. thesis is not an accomplishment in itself, but it
vanced centre in,
is a 'preparation for'life-Iong researches. My thesis is my starting point in
he experts of this
the race of the academic field. It is not only the problem-solving one but
Ja,ble suggestions
it is a problem-finding one, too, As we know, the- fields of Phonology and Morphology of Sanskrit are explored much and have recieved much attention, but the same cannot be
of Sanskrit and book in Gujarati,
I:"
said with regard to Syntax. There are still ~ few aspects which are not well understood and passive is one of them. Sanskrit Grammarians have
1e's own mother-
examined the parts of speech to their utmost depth. But along with the
er-tongue by his
depth, the width of the subject should also be examined., So I took this,
not reach to the
thesis as an interdiciplinary one. I wanted to know what modern lingnistic
arted translating
theories say about the subject. So I tried to explore the subjeclthrough
ftil te?ch'er in this
multi~dimensions.
, to the academic
Many people had assisted me in differ,ent ways, while this, work was, in progress. It is not possible to make individual references to all of them. "
l.rm happy family
I take this opportunity to express my deep sense of gratitude to my guide , Dr. Yogendra Vyas (Director, School of Languages, Gujarat University, Ahmedabad), whose erudite and yet patemal guidance helped me at all stages of the preparaticn of this book. I must also express my equally deep
Yogendra Vyas
sense of gratitude to Dr. Arvind Bhandari (Proft. Dept. of Linguistics, Gujarat University, Ahmeq;3.bad) who had taken very keen interest in my progress . : )., '.l'·'· ,.. ,'
and who}.jngrWgl~ly assisted nie throughout. My hElartfelt thanks are due
""'"
.
. . :i.~; ..;--.',-", ..
,"
". ,:: ::. .,
"
_
.~.
.
,.iWmAJ. M. Mahulkar (Former Head, Deptof lingUistics, M. S. University,
"'
:
·,;>'>B~~oda),
who showed me a new direction to think about language in a '
linguistic way. I also feeigrateful to Dr. J. M.Shukla andDr. B. D. Pandya who had inculcated in me an active interest in Sanskrit Grammar. Similarly my thanks are due to Dr. T. S. Nandi and Dr. V. M. Bhatt who had offered valuable assistance. (v)
. . . . . - .. _ - - - _ ...
_---
I am extremely thankful to my parents who had encouraged me to finish the task and whenever I faltered they had injected a fresh dose of enthusiasm at the right moment. My parents-in-law were equally considerate and helped me in various ways. It is not a mere formality to express my sense of appreciation for the encouragement that I recieved from my husband Mr. Amul Gandhi, who on account of my busy hours had to bear with inconveniences, which he stoically did. Last but not the least I am also indebted to Mr. G. H. Barot for producing a neat and elegantly typed script. My thanks are due to Dr. Sunanda Shastri who has gone through the whole book and read the proofs. The authorities of Gujarat University and University Grants Commission are also entitled·to my thi::lI1ks for having offered me all the facilities for not only undertaking and completing the work but also having offered me the monetary help to publish my work
/-c.".
(vi)
- --~
-------- - ----------- - - - - - -
aged me to finish se of enthusiasm erate and helped !SS
my sense of
my husband Mr. ad to bear with
irot for producing Sunanda Shastri
£he
Dfs. 'ants Commission
u:ope4'uL S- ~d '77le/n~o/
Ie facilities for not 19 offered me the
n~fio!¥a
JIU". $adice !1J. ~ Cfj/U!RA-ffluLa Yfthoae Uu/w£fo /V7WU9£edge
_umd
love fo" 9&/7l6ktd ~me 10 ~du/-ce /-
(vii)
Uu-,a,
~.
IN~
l- While studying Sanskrit
of passive construction attn: languages of the world, we the active construction is cor to myself was that why sue passive voice despite the psycho linguistically easily
i
of the two seemed attractivE constructions was made It
Contents
* * * 1.
To find out the reasons'
Forward
into Sanskrit gramatical trac
Preface
thrown some light on the su
Introduction
1
Some views of Sanskrit Grammarians on sentence'Constituents
3
sentence and distincitic constructions were studie On the other hand I d
2.
The meaning of the Passive
39
3. 4.
The Morphology of the Sanskr'it verbs & Participle's The Pragmatic Funciion of Sanskrit Passive
63 91
5.
Conclusion
. passive' sentences. They
129
(1 )
The. differE
(2)
The.const
(3)
The conte
I tried to find out as te two as far as meaning aSI accepted fact that there i as related to the truth-valui from the angle as to wile' between these two. Chap! of active and passive,. In modern Indian Ian and the number of partiGi (viii)
INTRODUCTION :'.~
.
.. ;: -,:
"
. ...•.•. :.. 'c.: .
l_ _ _ _ INTRODUCTION
I
__
While studying Sanskrit literature and sastras the frequent usage of passive construction attracted my attention. In all the major spoken languages of the world, we come acress the passive censtructien, but the active censtruction is censidered as basic. The questien that I pesed to myself was that why such an immense impertance is given to the passive veice despite the fact that the active voice is basic and psycholinguistically easily precessed than the passive. The analysis of the two seemed attractive, so the study of the Active and the Passive censtructiens was made the topic ef my study. To find out the reasons of the frequent usage of the passive, I looked into Sanskrit gramatical tradition. Whether the Sanskrit grammarians had threwn seme light en the subject was explored. Their views about overall sentence and distincition between the active and the
1
p~ssive
censtructions were studied. A short review is given in Chaper 1.
3
On the ether hand I decided ie explere three aspects of active & passive' ·sentences. They are
39 ; & Participles
63
91 129
(1 )
The difference ef meaning between the two.
(2)
The. censtructional difference between the two.
(3)
The context in which they are used.
I tried to. find eut as to. whether there is any difference between the two as far as meaning aspect is concerend. Hewever, it is a universally accepted fact that there is no differenceqf meaning b§lween the two· as related to. the truth-vaJue; The views ef mbdernsctJplarswere examined from the angle as to. whether
accerding:t(r.th~rTifhe·re is any difference
between these two.. Chapter 1/ deals with the semantico-syntactic aspect ef active and passive: In medern Indian languages, we have pseudopassive construction and the number of participial constructiens in VP is mere than the verbal
INTRODUCTION '
.. ,.:"
".
".: :":..
1
type. It became, therefore, necessary to ,find out whether these have their origin in Sanskrit. This aspect has been dealt with in Chapter III
requirements of the take illustrations fro!
by analysing morphological structure of the Active in contra-distinction to the Passive verb-phrase.
the language of Bh;
,
literary. I have, therefr
I
L.
also referred to Kali
The spoken sentence is the result of the interaction of many forces.
Uttara-Ramacharitan
Every speech community has its different concepts and for understanding that the study of the culture of the community is vitally essential.
In this way, I ha
Syntactic or morpho-phonemic forces are not the only sources of a spoken
the morphological ant
sentence. Behind an utterance there is a meaning system which is related
constructions. All thes,
to the culture. If a sentence is uttered in a particular way, then there
is no demarcating lin
are socio-culturalreasons behind it. If these were not to be probed the
of a sentence it is
study of the spoken sentence would be incomplete. So, the third aspect
The reason is that 11-.
is the utilisation of the Active and the Passive construction in the actual
pattern and social.tre interaction of these f
situation. Chapter IV deals with the effects of the extralinguistic forces on the speakers choice of sentence types. The Forces likely to effect
All though the tor with the Active and II'
speaker's choice would be : the context of utterance, the identity of the speaker and the listener, the relation between the two, the topic of
There is no di(fernce t aspects are concern·
the sentence, and the form of the conversation. These forces collectively mould an utterance.
.
,,
transitive Verb roots a
I
.L
Unfortunately, while studying: Sanskrit we are deprived .of its spoken form, and hence, we would not be able to catch an intonational fact.
roots. Hence, imper: analysed.
However, this is more than amply compensated by the existence of vast Sanskrit literature. Literature is the mirror of a community. It, therefore, gives us an idea about the contemporary social structure and culture. While Sanskrit grammarians provide minute details of structure of words, functional approach is in a way missing. It would become therefore, necessary to comprehend the language' from this angle and to take illustrations from its literature. On account of the vastness of literature it was not possible to cover all the works of Sanskrit literature. The study is based basically on the used in Sanskrit language of drama. The reason is, that the langiJ.age ,-.drama is more akin to the colloquial language. There are limitations to the language used in Kavyas and Mahakavya's. It ·is fattered by the 2
SE
INTRODUCTION
~
. .. . --. . . '0,
"'1
.~'.~'.l~;;.'.,"
INTRODUCTION
:her these have
requirements of the metre. It was, therefore thought more practical to
:h in Chapter III
take illustrations from the dramatic form. Even in the dramatic works
mtra-distinction
the language of Bhasa, being simpler, seems more colloquial than literary. I have, therefore, examined all the major works of Bhasa. I have, also referred to Kalidasa's Abhijiiana- sakuntalam and Btlavabhuti's
of many forces.
Uttara-Ramacharitam and also sudraka's Mrchhaka\ikam.
lr understanding itally essential.
In_ this way, I have tried to examine the semantic. the syntactic, the morphological and the pragmatic forces of the active and the passive
rces of a spoken I which is related
constructions. All these forces are inter-related and inter-dependent. There
way, then there
is no demarcating line, which might tell us that upto a particular stage
o be probed the
of a sentence it is semantic and thereonwards synatactic and so
the third aspect
The reason is that the speaker unconsciously follows some linguistic
ion in the actual
pattern and social trends. It is the function of a linguist to analyse the interaction of these forces behirid an utterance.
linguistic forces 3 likely to effect
on.
All though the topics· of the thesis includes impersonal type along
, the identity of two, the topic of
with the Active and the Passive, it is treated as 1:1 type of passive only. There is no differnce between the two as far as meaning or construction aspects are conc;:erned. We get Passive construction by passivising
rces collectively
transitive Verb roots and the impersonal by p'assivis'ing intrasitive verbroots. Hence, impersonal constructions have not been separately analysed.
'edqf its spoken. ltonational fact. lxistence of vast dty. It, therefore, ure and culture.
•
'uctureof words, i
:ome therefore, gle and to take
"", .
lossible to cover basically on the Jsed in Sanskrit
.
'i'~
Ire limitations to fattered by the INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
-1-
:a·. ,. -.'-, ... /~
3
--~----CHAPTER=i--SOME-viEWS
OF SANSKRIT-----
four thousand aphorisl B.C. wrote Varttikas (, PaQini. Patafijali in the
GRAMMARIANS ON THE SENTENCE CONSTITUENTS
both. These three-PaQ VyakaraQa,sastra, wr VyakaraQa of Sanskrit of a great grammarian, wrote a book named Sa Unfortunately howevel
It is ali accepted and proved fact that only a human being is born with potentials to commL'nicate through highly complex and yet the most condensed system called language_ Many centuries ago, this magical aspect of human brain has attracted Indian Grammarians_ No Grammar can be perfect as no languag~ can be moulded in a mould of rules and regulations_ Languages are not s~8reo-typed and do not follow some logic strictly_ Language is ever-changing and so there are many alterations, additions, omitions and above HiI, exceptions. But the highly enlightened tradition, with PaQini at its top gave a grammar which is next to perfect.
it is frequently referred of Bhartrhari. Then we It contains approximat all the. topics concen VakyapadTyam has b tradition, because it , Philosophical School ( VakyapadTyam are wr Bhartrhari himself wrot
Without scientific equipments, with their grammatical intuitions only, Indian Grammarians described phonetic, syntactic and semantic rules - of Sanskrit. They did not examine language only at the Syntactic and Semantic levels.· They described it on Metaphysical level, too. They looked upon grammar as one of the six Darsanas i.e. Philosophical treatise. They called the word as sabdbrahman. Bhartrhari starts his VakyapadTyam with,
as swopagnaFka. In th .on Maha_bha$ya viz., _
~R~ ~ ~W<~<:fG~-wr. I
fuc0cl<sl!h:rr
~ ~
«<1:
II (
grammatical elements grammarians, but the A.D.) SayaQacharya (1 A.D.) Moreover, in the and Nagesha Bhatta
["That beginningless and endiess one, ttie rmperishable Brahman of . which the essential nature is the world, which manifests in to objects and from which is the creation of the Universe.] The sabda-brahman is looked upon with awe and respect to such an extent that grammarians believe that the knowledge of sabda-Brahman leads to salvation.*1
The Concept of Sen Katyayana in the ( of sentence as-
The History of Sl')nskrit GrammatIcal Tradition:
d11~lct +!lU\£JCfi~
Th~ Sanskrit;'gramma.tical:tradition started ,very early. The use of
fOllowi~g terminology viz. nQ-u~\;:w:r), Verb (d1IMlii), Indeclinable (~),
l( Cfiff!
r.umber (~), case (~), andsuffix (~) etc. is found in Nirukta of Yaska. These terms might have been i.ntroduced even before Yaska, because the opinions of saka\ayana and
Garg~a
:so,
(CfWi '1) '
[-(A) Sentence ( ViSel;>aQa; and (A) sei
were referred to in the
PaQini, who wrote his AI;>\adhyayi in the styleof'ctphorisms which contains
These definitions sentence. ·It says tha is equated with a ser
4
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT GR,
Nirukta. A clear and systematic form of gramma'r was founded by Acharya .
i
.
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKR-ITGRAMI,IARIANS ... ..
~..
.'.~.'
~~.0' ~./-:'.'~/
.
ANSKRIT
::ONSTITUENTS luman being is born >Iex and yet the most 3S agb, this magical 3.rians. No Grammar 1 mould of rules and not follow some logic re many alterations, e highly enlightened ;h is next to perfect. 3.tical intuitions only, and semantic rules It .the Syntactic and . cal level, too. They s i.e. Philosophical :hartrhari starts his
four thousand aphorisms approximately. Katyayana in the 3rd Century B.C. wrote Varttikas (supplementary aphorisms) on the aphorisms of PMini. Patafijali in the 2nd Century B.C. wrote Bhasya-commentary on both. These three-Pal)ini, Katyayana and Patafijali are the founders of Vyakaral)a,sastra, who by their grammatical insights arranged the Vyakaral)a of Sanskrit Language, systematically. References are found of a great grammarian, namedVyai;li, before Katyayana & Patafijali; who wrote-a book named Sangraha which was consisted of one lakhofverses. Unfortunately however. this book Sangraha, is not available todaY,but it is frequently referred to in Patafijali 's Mahabhasya and VakyapadTyam of Bhartrhari. Then we come across with VakyapadTyam of Bhartrhari. It contains approximately 2000 verses (CliIRCliI) which describe nearly all the topics concerning ·to grammar prevailing during his period. VakyapadTyam has become milestone in the Sanskrit grammaticnl tradition, because it enabled the grammar to reach the position of Philosophical School (Darsana) in the real sense. The commentaries on VakyapadTyam are written by PUl)yaraja, V[sabhadeva, and Helaraja, Bhartrhari himself wrote a commentary on VakyapadTyam which is known as swopagna\Tka.ln the 9th Century A.D., Kaiya\a wrote a commentary
I
.
ishable Brahman of lifests in to objects respect to such an of sabda-Brahman
j
on Mahabhasya viz., Pradrpa .. After Kaiya\a, sribhoja desGl:ibed the grammatical elements in srngarapraki;isa. There were so many other grammarians, but the noteworthy are Purusoltamadeva (12th Century A.D.) Sayal)acharya (14th Century A.D.) and Bha\\oji Dixit, (16th Century A.D.) Moreover, in the 17th and the 18th Century A.D. Kaul)i;la Shalla and Nagesha Bha.\\a enriched the tradition. The Concept of Sentence : Katyayana in the discussion on Samarthya has given two definitions . . " ..' of sentence as"
r early.
The use of ldeclinable (f.or:mr), is found in Nirukta . 3ven before Yaska, 'e referred to in the
3'lI@Ollrl
~1ICll4C1iI~Clifu~t~ ClI<W:"l . . '.
~
I,
'.
(~m~~) .
'Q'P~ (crw; '1:) I (~mfA"CIi"()'
[-(A) Sentence (has ) a verb along With Avyaya, Karaka and ViSesaQa; and (A) §'entence (has) a verb]
ounded by Acharya lms which contains
These definitions'd'@note the presence of a single verb in a Simple sentence. It says that f6e're must be one verb in a sentence. A verb is equated with a senfe'nce.
LNSKR'rrGRAMt!lARIANS...
SOMEVIEWSOFSANSKRrrGRAMMARIANS...
... '
5
The meaning of a sentence includes some action (in which certain participants participate). Sanskrit grammarians describe the Notional and the Morphological levels of a sentence. The Chief Characteristic of a sentence is its completeness of the . meaning. The completeness of the meaning does not depend .on the number or the kind of words. A sentence is complete when it has a verb which denotes an action and the .other words which are its accessories. Only a noun or only a verb is not able to complete the meaning. If only a noun is spoken then it has some action which is to be understood by the listener. If only the verb is spoken then also the listener has to understand some noun as its accessory. To make communication easy and effective, sometimes, only single words are spoken and yet they are understood. It is our habit to supply s0l!le required word missing in an utterance . to bring about the completeness in the meaning, for example one asks.
The Nominal phi (*iq). , The Nom. inal s ~
suffix has many aile / bar)ena /
(mu'!
This / ina / suffi Instrumental case. If the allomorphic vari / salakaya / / bar)ai~ /
(~R
(orrUt:
The nominal su grammatical condit phonological conditil seen from the folio",
I
Base. Noun (~)
Thus in a sentence, the verb expresses the essential elements and the nouns express the other elements. Nouns are considered as the accessories in expressing the central element of the utterance. The other types. of words like indeclinables and adjectives denote some peculiarity in the elements expressed by v~rbs and nouns. So, in a sentence, verb and nouns are the central elements and Indiclinables .and Adjectives are the modifying elements.
Ger
The Surface Structure:
The Verbal Phra~
The Phrases (qc;) are the surface structure constituents of a sentence. They are two (~) (Nominal Phrase-t\!f) and (fu~) (Verbal phrase - V P ) \ "'
6
on one hand, has Tel and Number as gran each other indicate
IT
:: .. '
S.OMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT GRAMMARIANS ...
•
• 0'
SOMEVIEWS OFSANSKRITGF "., .
'-1R<1 i;:;:d 1:fG+!
n (in which certain ;cribe the Notional
I (P a.1 .4. 1 4 )
The Nominal phrase consists of the Noun (!'lIRtqR;cp) and the suffix (~9J
The Nominal suffix (~9) denotes gender, Number and case. This suffix has many allomorphic realizations. For Example-
lmpleteness of the not depend on the lete when it has a lrds whic.h are its Ie to complete the ne action which is ; spoken then also ccessory. To make y single words are
/ bal)ena / (~) / bal)a I + I ina I. . This I ina I suffix denotes masculine gender, singularity and the Instrumental case. If the gender is changed or the number is changed, the allomorphic variation also changes.
I salakaya /
;ing in an utterance example one asks. radatta). 'Oevadatta' 3SS of the meaning. Oevadatta, but it is indicates Oevadatta Ie question is ~ . 'er. is' ~ (going), In of going) but from. I.Thus even a single ness of the meaning a sentence.
(~I(illcp
I salaka I (Fem) + I ya /
/ bal)ail) I (orrdt) /
bal)a / (Masc) + I ail) I
The nominal suffix
('1:~T~T)
has gender, Number and Case as
grammatical conditions for its realization. There are many othe' phonological conditions imposed by the nature of noun base. It can be seen from the following diagram. Nominal Phrase (~~)
.
I
I
. I
Base Noun
Suffix Allomorphs'
("1f.'1)
(*ft)
I Grammatically Conditioned
ential elements and considered as the utterance. The other )te some peculiarity in a sentence, verb ; and Adjectives are
Phonologically . Conditioned
I
I Gender
Number Case
Nouns Ending . in Vowel
. ;"
~
$ 3 :;;- '"' 3'lT 31'T·
3'1 3'11
'1i:
~
Nouns Ending in Cons.onanl
The Verbal Phrase consists of a verb and a suffix.This suffix (~) on one hand, has Te.·nse and Mood and on the other hand, has Person
uents of a sentence. d (P~T) (Verbal
and Number as gramiTlatical condition. The allomorphs in contrast to each other indicatem,eaning cifTense and Mood. The Morphology of the SOMEVIEWSOFsANSKRrrGRAMMARIANS...
;ANSKRrr GRAMMARIANS ... (.,.
.-".
.'
. ...::.~
.
.
.
'
..
"
.
" -....
7
--~----~---------~.------
verbal phrase is described in details in Chapter III (The Morphology of the Sanskrit Verb).
dimensions - time aT parts arranged in a The various stat
ASeritence According to Sanskrit Grammatical Tradition.
number of particip Sentence (tWffl)
grammatical traditio
//~ Nominal Phrase
participant roles. Tt Instrument(~),
thE and the Abode (?;ITt
Verbal Phrase (finRr)
minor actions but as E
~ Noun
Adjective
A
Suffix
Base
All the Karakas get iT
Indeclinables
verb
(3l<1m)
(=)
(fu,j-qur)
Base
the Karakas (They a
A
Suffix
Base
only one participant '..,---
Suffix
The transitive VE e.g.
~~ ~
Concord
. '""IIG~: .n-q$-ml Agreement
The Deep Structure
It seems that the Sanskrit Gramma:'ians·have discussed three aspects , of the Deep Structure.
Bhartrhari uses t the participants. Sac Sadl ri.':ras are the ac the action.
(1) The Propositional Meaning (Action Participants)(q;nq; ~q)
(2) The Word Meaning (Base-Suffix)
(wrfu
~)
(3) . The Motivation of the Speaker, (fmr~-TT)
There are two st~ Both of them are ref differentiate between 1 the accessories in)he
ThePre.positional Meaning
The propositional meaning consists of two Units Action and Participants.
e.g. In
According to Sanskrit grammariims Action is ni;lt directly perceived, but human mind perceives the variou's states of: fine or more objects into consolidated form. In the same way different s~Fltes of various objects are being consolidated to form notion of action. Iripther words, the action two is superimposed on various states of objects.Th~,~ . ...... is done through ,"
.... '.-"------.-:..-
--------------'~.;;;.. -8 . . . SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT GRAMMARIANS•••
<>' ,"'
,' . .
Cl'i'""lfl
at present, and in ~ with time. So the sec its existence and it .
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRITGF
e Morphology of
dimensions - time and direction. Action is an abstract process having parts arranged in a temporal sequence e.g ~, ~ etc. The various states of objects have been categorised into limited
'radition.
number of participant roles which are called Karakas. Sanskrit grammatical tradition categorized various states of objects into six participant roles. They are the Agent (cnm), the Object (cn1{) , the Instrument (Cfi<:UT), the rase
Recipient(~l">lc;H),
the Point of departure (3r:fTc;"R)
and the Abode (mW'f;TI1l). All the participants are the doers of their minor actions but as soon as they enter into the major action they become the Karakas (They are discussed in detail in the concept of Karakas.) All the Karakas get involved with an Action.The intransitive verbs have
verb
only one participant e.g. (Suresh walks) Base
(a child cries)
Suffix
'(W)'fir)(~
=l
The transitive verbs can have more than one participant roles
_________O'i
e.g. imq)
'i1
i.Ll:
=ement
~~ ~ qafu I (Devadatta reads a book), . ~
mq
,u;;n I>II~oOIl
sed three aspects· ltS)(C!ilT
nits Action and irectly perceived, or more objects of various objects words, the action jone through two
miC;fu I
m -c;cn:fu. I
,~
(The king gives a cow to a brahmin).
Bhartrhari uses the terms Sadhya and Sadhana for the action and. the participants. Sadhya is an action - that to be accomplished and Sadll,,'nas arethe accessories - the means in the accomplishment of the action. There are two states of objects in a sentence - static and Dynamic. Both of them are realized througr VRt. Sanskrit grarnmarians do not differentiate between the Action an'if the State. The object~ are tii~ means" . the accessories in::ihe accompliihment of the
actio~ as well as the State.
e.g. In
CR+J:
is understood in a particular way, i.e. we infer its existence at present, and in
SKRIT GRAMMARIAN5. ..
(Ma<;lhavya 'eats sweets),
"';
",":
.
.";.'.
SOMEVIEWSOFSANSKRITGRAMMA~IANS . .:». ..;·
... ~.
.
" 9,' . ",
','
The Word Meaning:
of objects and con,
Sanskrit grammatical tradition classifies the words into classes such
upon as seperate f
as Noun (;n+r), Verb (3'l 1'!Jll 1(1) Indeclinables (:wm:r) and Particles (f.:r:mrl.
it can only be infE
fu;m is a p roce~
They discuss the general meaning of each class. The discussion of the meanin.g of ther Nouns and the Verbs is
sequence. They c example the actic
focw;;sed here.
(1) igniting the stc The meaning of a verb :
change which hap
Compared to what is there, what is yet to be is more important.
the above sequen
According to Katyayana 's definition "ekatiQvakyam' also, the verb is
as 'cooking' (~
more important in a sentence. The verb has two categories VRT (Dhatu)
sequentially throu!
and the suffix (tiQ). The VRt is conceived as the most significant part
speaker cognises
of the sentence.
he has acquired if action.
Nagesha starts his discussion with the words 31"1.1" ~ - ~~ - "kl<4l<:;, ~ ~'('l14il I ~
(on ~
Rum
Bhartrhari say
in
TfI1~~{q'Qa: ~
'Tc'fl1. )
~ !A'IlR
[The meaning of the VRt (verbroot) which is the root of all the words-
. [The sequenti;:
will be described]
of the parts havin!
The meaning of the Vrt (Verbroot) :
The word
Yaska says ~ 3'lIMkFl, I [(The verb (has action (as) its main (meaning)] and Patafijali says RP'QlqlG:l ..il UI<j,: I (VRT denotes Action). According to Nagesha the
'Q\,,:H1Q;ill ill141{: ~ I (on
'T'
the action. Suppose on one part and the
mcmf Ruh:r
Nagesha has s
in 'Tc'fl1.) [The meaning of a root is an action (
q
meaning of VRt is
lflC'ili'J!Ml
some result.] The meaning of a VRt is not mere action, but that action which has some result (G1C'i").
tp('f
is a change of state of the concerned
object caused by an action. This result (G1C'i") may ·be actually brought about or imposed. e.g. in
tm: ~ (God stays), there is nothing which
is brought about by the State oftm... According to, Sanskrit grammatical tradition, the characteristics of an Action (~) is as follows.
[The totality c1 considered as an c
An Action is not perceptible. The means ar~:visible, but the means
It is said -
are not actions. The speaker absiractsthe actionthrough various states . ;:.'-::
,"
.. 'j 6.' '.:
~?MEVIEWS OF SANSKRrr GRAMMARIANS..,
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRrr'
"', L>: ' . .
of objects and conceptualizes its meaning of Action. The action is looked upon as seperate from the means. Action cannot be seen just like means,
into classes such I Particles (R
it can only be inferred.*3
fsnm is a process having parts. These parts are arranged in a temporal
s. ~nd
sequence. They do not go simultaneously, they 'do not coexist. For
the Verbs is
example the action of cooking can be said having following parts. (1! igniting the stove (2) putting the vessel with rice on it (3) and the change which happens in the corn. These various actions performed in more important.
the above sequence are unified in one act of cognition and is known
also, the verb is
as 'cooking' ('Mfu). Th'e sub-aclions of a main action are extracted
)ries VRT (Dhatu)
sequentially through various states or actions of objects involved. 'The
3t significant part
speaker cognises the whole process only by one word ~; because he has acquired· it in a unity. The unity or the collection of parts is called action. Bhart(hari says-
n ~·Rum in
TfUfl"lij{Cl'llQ: -::l C\
wm
,t of all the words-
=, " •. ';"'"
Slili,lF""Hlli... I
!A'f)R
"
('i:fT.1:f.fWm ~~T-'f)In:'f)1 Ii)
.. [The sequential distinction imagined by the speaker in the totality of the parts having same characteristics is known as· an action.]*4 The word ~ can also be used for. one of the parts of the totality of the action. Suppose, the igniting of wood. Here the whole action is imposed
1d Patafijali says
on one part and the word ~ is used for that single part only.
to Nagesha the
(orh.n~ Ruh:r
Nagesha has said
hich brings about In, but that action of the concerned , actually brought is nothing which ,skrit grammatical 9
1{~'f){i:J'lla-sfq- ~~ql{(qlC; 31R;P$l'llUI'f)IM-sftr ~,
'Mfu
~ ,?lIl ~re
~ ~ ~tf M If"uct I: " (on ~
f.!u\
in Y'Wi. Pg.140)
[The totality cp.n be imposed on the single part and it can be considered as an action.
as follows.
It is said -
Ie, but the means 19h various states
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT GRAMMARJAN~::. :...; 11
ISKRIT GRAMMARIANS.• ,
.,,-. ',.,
C/.,._.
",
,
"
.
..: '."
.
,
--.-------
'Action' can be considered in the action of 'cooking' in totality or one of its parts, because they remain th!3 same by nature.] Another charecteristic of &-m is that all the concerned Karakas get involved with it (&-m). Patafijali has said - ~1Oli l'I'1fflfcl:ijcr: &-m [Action (fui<:rr) is a particular mode of behaviour on the part of the
(The karaka wi the particular nurr According to B modifies that actie
accessories.] Action is Sadhya i.e. to be accomplished. It requires
Paoini introdl number of allomor
something in its acomplishment. What it requires are the medns (the
Lakara. Accordin£
Sadhanas, the Karakas). It is a speciai mode of behaviour of the Karakas,
'f>r<"Tfu~N
to get involved with an action. In a unified or a collected sentence all
p,244) Suffix tio (L
the Karakas get involver:! with the action (&-m) according to the role
particular moment
they have (their 'hWt>t
a particular karaka
~
w,m
'151 @11l
I' [An action is that in which all the distinguishing
Karakas get involved]. (on ~ in
p.140). Here the word
qc;r+f.
;:ref shows all the Karakas are for the accomplishment of the action and so all the Karkas get involved with an action (fu;<:rr). All the Karakas have their subordinate actions. They are independent for their subordinate actions, but as soon as they enter into the main action, they loose their independence and play the role required in the main action. The object: have th'e potentiality to get involved with ari action in their different Karaka:
roles. Nagesh says that Karaka is the Producer'(~). of Action (fu;<:rr) and action is produced (~) by it. So they require some linkage as ~-~ and so (&
- the VRt denotes Action. - Action is invisible, it can only be inferred. It is a process having parts arranged in a temporal sequence. All the Karakas get involved with an action (&-m). ~",'
is Time('liTC'f). Time is a mear be measured in
0
particularizes th.at that which has sel ~-m::a ~ ~
~~
This sequence , to Time and action and the distinction:
Tense : (q;n;r)
The meaning of the suffix (tiO) :
".\
The suffix (tiO) qualifies the action. Nage~ha says mr ffii'i;
~<.nfuP-iT"C'f>lT 'f>rcrT~'q cm1:ffi"-ftr~T1Sf~ p.130)
One of the thr,
[Oi8\i, prastha, [ as the tense is CI distinguishes all.]
Thus according to Sanskrit grammatical tradition
'Wfl'f.
-
.
J
I "(on
J"'
:.·~./\~5~~:~: "'. -
.
~:ofRuf;;r in
-,
The Sanskrit G Tense. The mood i: from their definitio seperately, The 1·
..:-;,:"
./5;/;' . . '>\"i· >,SOME'VJEWS OF SANSKRrr GRAMMARIANS ... '.,' :'.',; :,. . :,",
.-
.~:
~ .- ~.: " ~
SOMEVIEWS OFsANsKRn
:ing' in totality or
the particular number; and the tense are the adjective of action.]
nature.] 'ned Karakas get
l'I'ifTlfil~k PsPm I the part of the lhed. It requires !
(The karaka which is denoted by the suffix til! and which also shows
the medns (the
According to Bharjrhari Vrt denotes action in general and suffix (til!) modifies that action.*5 Pal!ini introduced lakara as an abstract morpheme to denote a nUi!1ber of allomorphs. til! is a substitute (i',r' - ,~~T). in the place of Lakara. According to Nagesha til!
(i"TR:m
means ;n' '1~~41 fu~T"I
ur of the Karakas,
~~'t"I - 4i1{4ifi1~~ ~~lljlo;H~ ;mt I (on "r4iT,:r~ in
:ted sentence all
p.244) Suffix til! (Ladesh) denotes a particular number (~ Ptr~'t"I), a
·rding to the role
particular moment of time (~~'t"I) (which also includes Moods (:acl')
d {144i1 {4i Hl&lil 1-
a particular karaka (i.e.(4iill or
4i1l-
Wf+l'.
4i1{4ifil~N) or mere action (~).
1e distinguishing I. Here the word of the action and All the Karakas
One of the three categories of the meani'ng denoted by the suffix is Time(4iTC'f).
their subordinate
Time is a means of measuring Action. An action is abstract, it cannot
, they loose their
be measured in other ways. VRt denotes action in general, but 4iTC'f
:tion. The object:
particularizes that action. It has already been discussed that action is
r different Karaka
that which has. sequence.
of Action (PsPm) . some linkage as
~
\~
,«'''''-~ {!
~0;..",-,....,.-.4
1--,<1";«,<1
"PC"1\1
I
~ 4i1('1{,P'lii,,,!]:41 ~ ~ /I (in 4i1('1{l'i~~T. in crr.
~I
[Dis\i, prastha, gold ecl. are considered to distinguish the statues, where as the tense is considered to distinguish an action, while number. distinguishes all.] Iporal sequence.
(PsPm).
This sequence is of the various states of the objects, but it is attributed . to Time and action is inferred as having temporal sequence. Time is one, and the distinctions like past, present and future are imposed on it. Tense : (
" .
"
fh~
1ys (1?T
Rt ~<:jj"ai
~~Ruf<-T
in
Sanskrit Grammatical tradition gives 10 different meanings of Tense. The mood is·,noHreated seperately. However, it can be inferred from their definitions':tha1 they consider Tense (4iTC'f) and Mood (:acl') seperately. The 10 e,f1ieg~ri~~ are illustrated as under: -
. lKRIT GRAMMARIANS ...
:,~..
.... :-:,~.. ~}:?;.:
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT GRAMMARilfNS:';:'l:t: .:}:.
-""""
~- ..
-.,,-
.~ :":·~f~·::~.?::;~~~:\/ ," . ...... ,~..
.
The Past Tense :
The Suffix
1------------
(~)
The action whit
I
Tense,
is realised through
Mood
Nagesa says -
3r"r
I Subjunctive
I
~ l:f
Imperative
Potential
Conditional
(01'rvrP-h
(fuIlp,l-J
(ISf.41Irlq't'a4)
(~)
([;,'''l')
(<W
"
in 'BlT. p.260) [The past is tha (~) at the'
Past
Present
There are three
Future
(~)
, (WI)
the Remote_
I
I I. AOrlst
(a) The SimplE
"
Remote
Simple
Periphrastic
(~)
(
(Indefinite or
(~)
(~
(~)
General
(0j,C)
siJple
(:;rnwr) (~i;')
The Present Tense :.
The simple p, day. This past tens two. From the usagE in general. e.g, - ~ (b) The Aorist Traditionall}
The action which has begun and not yet completed but is continuous· is realized ·through pre'sent tense* 6
to particular time. I
'1T~~
Nagesa says :
(c) The Remot, mn:1.TT -1:rm-p'TTt.{-Tftn l;TT 1:wT~-m{-<'T"'T, I (on p.248)
The remote pa! its utterance or rath
[The action which has been started and not yet completed is considered having present tense.J
to the forest]. The Future Tense
e.g.- ~cKd: ~ [Devadatta goesJ. It is also used for what is true for all time
e. g. mt1 .; '<1 H""1 i Rfh ~ CI ct (i"i ( f'lp:n crt £11" "ffl"i ~~ I [In the North (there is) a king of mountai~*:(baving) divine soul, named '," .. HimalayaJ
The action whic Nagesha hasg "'(Clu("<4
'q q
. . . ~; .. ~
. .'·1~. ,....
'
SOMI'vtEWSOFSANSKRITGRAMMARIANS...
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT'
-----------------
The Past Tense : The action which has been completed at the time of its utterance
l
is realised through Past tense.
Jod
Nagesa says ,tial
Conditional
'-b
(f*.~lf(1q~«f)
, ii
(~
~
t[
Clct'ii'icrR:r - >lfAl1lfil - f.;bI11q(ij~~ , (on <;~~
in '«111; p.260) [The past is that which is denoted by the action which is destoryed (Clct'ii'i<JR:r) at the time of its utterance.]
Future
There are three past tenses in Sanskrit - the Simple, the Aorist &
~J
the Remote.
I
(a) The Simple Past Periphrastic
)r
(~)
(~)
(~)
:
The simple past denotes the action done previous to the current day. This past tense became more frequent in usage, than the other two_ From the usage, it can be said that this past denotes the past tense in general. e.g, - ~ "i'~I'in,"! ~ I [Devadatta went to Bombay].
_ut is continuous
(b) The Aorist (3:rocFf) : Traditionally, the Aorist refers to the past without any reference
to particular time.-It is not frequently used as the simple past (e.g.) "IT ~ ~T
«i
3m<1:
m"m:
<.1'"lI: I
(c) The Remote Past: ·m~<'T"~
I (0n The remote past denotes past action done previous to the day of its utterance or rather in the remote past e.g. Ul1:
completed is
;Jf1T111
[Rama went
to the forest]. The Future Tense:
.
ed for what is
The action which is yet to be started is realised through future tense.
m~1 ne soul, named
Nagesha has give_n its definition as
'l'IICl GQ"\"
Irr GRAMMARIANS ...
"q
Cl ct '"J1'i >I j;''>l' q>lhl 111\1,
~~~in-q'~~:;P-252) .....'.'
RP
SOMEVIEWSOF sANSKRrrGRAMMARIANS:.: ..·· '15: - _-,-.0 .
- ..... , ..
,
. - - - - - - - - - - - _.. -._.-
.. _- ... --._ .. _-"---_ . .
----~
·-.------~
[The future is that which is denoted by the action which is not present (1WT'm<:r) at the time of its utterance.] There are two types of future-
simple
(~)
and periphrastic
(~'11qct"').
Periphrastic future
(~H.Jct'1
'l'Ifi1ISQ<'t) resembles simple past (
does not take place on the day of its utterance, while the action of simple future (
~,!ff JIIi'llSQl'ii Devadatta will go to Bombay). The periphrastic future
Sanskrit grammaticc also denotes agreemen is shown by~, e verb also takes the sum, between the Karaka al
is not frequently used as the simple future. Moods (-31~) : Sanskrit grammatical tradition involves moods in tense. So <'!>1C'lfq~'j-q also means :;H~fu~Tl;f. There are four moods. The sUbjunctive: It was used only in the Vedas.
In active
'lXlt and the verb and
il the agreement betwee
The Imperative: It is used in the second person in the sense of command or gentle advice. In the second or the third person it is also used as Benedictive or Blessings. e.g. ~.sor
,!fuR: ~
~ ~
,I [Mayall the people be happy]
The Potential: There are two kinds.of Poteniial (ftrfui-the pot~ntial and the Benidictive (:m~ft;)* 7
~
Thus, the VRt take Karakas. If the karaka
c
is taken; if it denotes,
The most general application of the potential is in giving commands, in laying down precepts etc. The Benedictive Mood is always used in
'§
I. [a
'i@fiIA ~
and ~~ '1.-m'1: ~ I [may your paths be auspicious]
giving Blessing (e.g.
sentence~
~T +i~ I)
The Conditional: In the {i" ~ ~ ~ f'$plllhlqct'l. (pa.3.3.131) the word 31Rlq'dl denotes that "When the action is not performed'. It is used for the. . past ('I1(f) as well as the future ('l"1~&j(j). It denotes• C\ ._ •. .~
the action in the past or the future where the nqn-performance of the
plurality, the plural torn suffix (tilJ) which quali Nagesa says : (f5[
fu-&:
~~TWffit~RO\t\
~
in
t[(il
[The number deno denoted by the suffix
action is implied. , Thus qm;r
(including 31~) is one of the meanings of the suffix.
th~e;;po"Y.lrs:·~t ~~ i.e 'I>TC'f~rft:p Metaphysically. H'eJhr~kS f~at the whole world is
According to Bhartrhari it is one of He has discussed it
<'!> I{ili~ ~'j-q
As has been discus denoted by VRt. <'!>df~~~. result of the VRt e.g: 1
its manifestation. *8 . ,'\",
~"
.:. ': ......
1:6
'.:.:'.
.
.~
·...SOMEVIEWSOFSANSKRITGRAMMARIANS...
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRITGRA
ction which is not present are two types of future-
Sanskrit grammatical tradition considers +I~ I as number. But ~
'iphrastic future (
also denotes agreement. The agreement between Karaka and the verb
a sense, that the action
I
is shown by +I~I, e.g. If the karaka (~) is in singular, then the
"'hile the action of simple
verb also takes, the suffix of singular and thereby denotes the agreement
same day. (e.g. ~CRn:
!
between the Karaka and the verb. e.g .
. The periphrastic future [a person goesJ tion involves moods in
[two persons go] and
ere are four moods.
[(more than two) persons goJ;
Vedas.
!
In active sentences the suffix (til)) shows the agreement between
gmt and the verb and in the passive sentences the suffix (tii)) demotes
person in the sense of 3
the agreement' between ,~ and the verb e.g.
third person it is also
[a bO,ok is being read] )Ie be happyJ 3
'3;,!"(l<'hIH ~
be auspicious]
I [books are being read].
Thus, the VRt takes the til) suffix according to the number of the Karaka's.lf the Karaka dE)notes singularity, the singular form of the suffix
~ial (ftrr'1r)-the potential
is taken; if it denotes duality the dual form is taken and if it denotes plurality, the plural form is taken. Thus, the agreement is shown by the
s in giving commands,
suffix (til)) which qualifies K~raka
)od is always used in
Nagesa says :
~ ~R oc;~-%'MI Oc;cl-~ fu~T1SfUT1'!: I (on G~IC'1<'h1{10HO\'4 in 1:ffi1i. p285)
)'4IRl'isil· (pa.3.3.131) is not performE)d'. It
(f?[
(ll~~(l). , It denotes l-performance of the
[The number denoted by the sufix til) is an adjective of the tense denoted by the suffix til).] <'hIN)Pcl~N
anings of the suffix.
As has been discussed above, Action and Result (
'~~ i.e <'hTC'Hrfu>
It the whole world is
result of the VRt e.g:fctin· -~dlflir:J the sentence ••
'
'.'.'
'.
..
:
.
SANSKRIT GRAMMARIANS...
::.. :
-',
. ,.'.~
..
•• '. L
:':',,"
:k..:. . . . ,'... ~l..:,:.:.••' :~.'
<, 'iF' ,:,," '..
SOMEVIEWSOFSANSKRITGRAMMARiA"l:S.• ',::'
",.
,',
.';
:,", ..... .
•
......;..;.
'4~G'i1: ~ q--ofu
I
-------~---------'-'-
[Yagnadatta reads. a book] denotes the action of Yagnadatta. denotes Agent (~) i.e. it is Active (~mw) while in ~
fu
~ (1:fG)
qq:l:ffi
Bhartrhari says that
[a book is being read], the sutfixdenotes the result 1:!lc'f of the action
it is said that the midd
of reading ':JCFf 64IYI{. Thus the suffix denotes either agent (~) or object (cp-,:f) i.e. Agent (~) in the Active sentences and Object (cp-,:f)
the action acrues to thE Active voice (4{{J'tqC;) is
in the passive sentences. Sometimes it denotes neither Agent nor Object
person other than the
but only action (i.e. mer ) In the sentences like
only Action. Thus, the suffix til) denotes Agent (~) or Object (cp-,:f) and sometimes only Action (i.e.mer)
it is
m
(sacrifies for
(the host) then it is 'j,{ITh for the host)
Comment: This is not the primary function of the suffix. It shows only person and number. It grammatically agrees with the Agent (~) or the Object (~~ of the sentence and that is how ('IiC!f) or(cp-,:f) can be inferred through its,utterance e.g.
When the performe
rrm-fu [(he) goes] can be inferred
Thus, according te denotes (a) ~, ~, mer
¥q
and ~
as having an Agent which is different from 11'<\j1f1i [(I) go] and ~fu
(b)
[(you) go]. Thus, (~) or (~) can be inferred through til). til) does
The meaning of tl
not denote them.
The nouns are the action. The noun-phras
According to Bh<;lrtrhari, person is als9 involved· in ladesa (tir:i), directly
The stem is called '1T"
or indirectly. There are three persons in Sanskrit. According to Pal)ini
The meaning ofm
they are 3l'PH{i'l'"l: I (pa.1.4.107)(i.e. the first person), '!~~
rt IlllR I (-A 'noun' has Skanda Swami in his
~ {·:?uf.:t~fq 1Wl'1: I (pa.1.4.105)(Le.the Second person)
and ~N ~~ I (pa.1.4.1 08) (i.e the third person). All the three persons have different suffixes to express them. The first person is used when the action of the speaker is denoted and the third person is used for In thea-ctive and the passive sentences the\ierb takes the person according to q;nf or ~ and it can take any o(the persons, while in
nQ~·object(~) and only action is denoted, th~re is no questioff1ift~king the first or the second
. impersonals as there is neither AgentJ
person. So it always takes the third pe'fsbrr.That is why Pal)ini has said I so that all
thad~maj1i~'C:9meinto '
,
•..•.,. '..
the third person.*10
''''',,',.:. ,"
- -_.-.- . ----- _...
_.
;;nfu - ;:;ffin : According to, San~l and particular or Individ primarily and in others. is denoted primarily ar
'. .
-~.'"
,.,:: .. ' '::-18' .. SOMEVIEWSOFSJlNSKRrrGRAMMARIANS...
........ -
[The appropriateni is object (U"i
all that remains.*9
~N ~~
P("I~l/{'l~:at(l: "
__ ..
_.. _-',
.' :o.r,lEVIEWS OF SANSKRrr GRI
!
._--------_._.. _ . _ . _ - - . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ction of Yagnadatta. ) while in 'i~ ·esult
tp('f
fu
"Rl:<:Rf
of the action
either agent (~) or mces and Object ('li+f) leither Agent nor Object , like 7T~7m:Tt (:JF-l":) the people J. It denotes
(~) or Object ('li+f)
Bhartrhari says that voice (q<;) is also denoted by the suffix. Formerly it is said that the middle voice (31I("1~qc;) is used when the result of the action acrues to the doer or the performer of the action, while the Active voice (quJ\qc;) is used when the result of the action goes to the person other than the doer. e.g.
&
<:N!fu
When the performer performs the sacrifice for his own sake, then it is ~ (sacrifies for his own self) and if he performs for the £j.'iPiH (the host) then it is '1,fift'><1: £F,.PiHli:i ~ (the priest performs a sacrifice for the host)
of the suffix. It shows , with the Agent (
.ow (~)
or('li+f) can
goe.sJ can be inferred
f1:r [(I) goJ and ~fu through til). til) does
Thus, according to Sanskrit grammatical tradition, the suffix til) dEmotes (a) (b)
'RIf,
'li+f, mer, {i~"li-i:il
~q
and 'Ilf0
and 1'TII& (directly or indirectly)
The meaning of the Noun Phrase: The nouns are the means (sadhana) in the accomplishment of the .
.
.
action. The noun-phrase (~) has two constitutents- stem ands·uffix. in IMesa (til)), directly .. According to Panini person), 'i~~ .the Second person) All th~, three persons )erson is used when j
person is used for
· The stem is called ;n
Skanda Swami in his commentary on Nirukta r",ls·JI{is:Mi:il: '{'fc;'mcr: ~ ~... I "'\ "". .... ~IH
[The appropriateness for the relationship with gender number etc. is object (~), where it is predominant, it is called
lrb takes the person 1e persons, while in )ject('li+f) and only
("iTl1).J
mfu-~:
According to, Sanskrit grar:nrnarian~ ("iTl1) denotes both Universal
"Ilfu
first or the second
and particular or Individ~al ~j~pj'r.i'Some cases, Universality"llfu is denoted
why Pal)ini has said
primarily and in others secondarily; while in. some cases Individuality.
e third person. *10
is denoted primarily and in:9thers
9
•
•
•
••
8~pppdarily. *11 •
to'
c.' ",' >'~
... "\;.~.'.'," .
.~:,- ," ;l\NsKRrrGRAMMARIANS....
· SQMEVIEWSOFSANSKRrTGRAMMARIANS.,.'·
19"'::
"A;::: ',.'
~ ~ instead of
According to Bhartrhari direction (~) and properties(lJ"f) are the two
of Devadatta, even wit
attributes of objects (SfClf). Every object is analysed from temporal and
According to Bha
spatial dimensions. As has been discussed that Sadhya and Sadhana together brings about the completeness of meaning and as Sadhya denoted
i.e. to express and to
by the verb shows the temporal dimension the object denoted by;:n11 must
the light itself as well
have to show the spatial dimension, So direction (~) is an attribute of
~ and
an individual which delimits the universal for the situation in which it is uttered.
and to be expressed.
Nagesa approves Bhart~hari's view quoting Patafijali and Paoini,and
ser'les, ~, 31T, 'll and
m<'\. Words t
its, ~,
adds other three meanings to ;:w:r. They are Gender (~) Number
meanings cannot be '
(fl~"iiA I)
meaning and so the
and Karaka.
are not primarily altai
The Gender:
meaning cannot be (
Words mayor may not have overt suffixes denoting gender for example
~~. That is why
tal or iiI denoting feminity and so on. And yet,we know its gender such as /wakl and Idikl are feminine, though there is neither I a I nor /i/. So Nagesa says that gender is one of the meanings of;n+r, though it is denoted by the suffixes. R1~:'ll1rq "'fTliT~ I
i tilctili@<1, I (on ~ in
$I(i1<j ['1
tIWT.
understand thEl word, Nagesha also ap accepts the form of It i.e. Secondarily.
P-388)
;:rriT~T says ~~T<:fO ~~I""iql"i'lOl~"i':
[The Gender is one of the meanings of;:w:r, it is denoted by the .suffix.]
Thus ;:w:r denote:
The Number:
(1) Both ;;orrfu (un
Just like gender, Number is also the meaning of;:n11 and it is denoted by the suffix. In the sutra 311~~@: (pa. 1.3.5) ~ has the meaning of plural
(~
If,
and yet it takes singular
(W
instead of plural
(~
(2) ~'T (Gendel .
we
(3) ~TOG (word fon
take it in the sense of plural.
The meaning of the
mteA1N ~ I
The suffix/sup/de
~ oalctiliiill
The Gender and thE
[Number is also one of the meanings of;n+r, it is denoted by the case
There are three!
suffix.]
The Karaka:
.
.
,"
.
.;:"::.,
Except the first anc '.
and the Neutral are t
Just like ihe gender and.JJle number, the ilil:r
There are three nur
and not in the case-suffix;:thdiJgh::i!'ls'denoted by it. If someone says ....... ,:. . ,
"
,
,
.',
-: .
,
:SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT (
':';, :,-....
20' " 'SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT GRAMMARIANS,.. ;:' , .
. . _- -...
~.-
... ,.-.--- ..
---~-.-~.-
...,,-.,
.
.
, ;
perties(TT) are the two
~
led from temporal and
of Devadatta, even without any sup suffix.*12
Sadhya and Sadhana
1R3fu
instead of ~ :
lRI3fu the
listner understands the,' i5,-q
According to Bhartrhari the word has two powers
~
ar·d
CIlWP
and as Sadhya denoted
i.e. to express and to be expressed. Just like a light of a torch shows
ct denoted by;n+:r must
the light itself as well as the thing it lits in the same way, words convey
r~) is an attribute of situation in which it is
~ and ~. Words have two powers as ~. and crRI"fi
to express
and to be expressed. The word Rama means an object which denotes its,
"lTfu,
~, ~, ·(1'$:&41, ~
and which is expressed by a
.tanjali and Pal)ini,and
series, "
nder (~) Number
meanings cannot be conveyed. The words are uttered to convey some
311, l'f and so on, without which the above mentioned five
meaning and so the particular series of the letters are utter~d which are not primarily attached with the meaning part but without which the ng gender for example know its gender such lither / a / nor Ii/. So
meaning cannot be conveyed. So it is one of the important factors of
~1I
l'f, though it is denoted
accepts the form of the word in the meaning of the word as its adjective
wt .in qc;p:r.
i.e. Secondarily. P-388)
jenoted by the suffix.]
~~T says ~~140I(1l:11 ~TOGl~ftr ~~ mWr' I ~ ~ ~ ~ ~1Q ~
3lRfur ~ ~ I
.
Thus ;n+:r denotes ;n+:r and it is denoted
(1) Both ;;rrfu (universal) and. (Individual)
rPc;- has the meaning
(2) ~1T (Gender) f!~&41 (number) and ~
d of plural (~ we
(3)
~T
(word form) secondarily
The meaning of the suffix (sup) : The suffix/sup/denotes gender-number and kiiraka.
'-391 ) denoted by the case
The Gender and the Number: There are three genders-the Masculine, the Feminine and the Neutral. Except the first and the second Case, the suffixes of the Masculine
also remains in;n+l it. If someone says ANsKRIT GRAMMARIANS,.. ;
and the Neutral are the sa~e.Ttie·~f~.minine gender has different suffixes. There are three
numbers-the$ing~lar!-fhe Dual and the Plural. All the . '.. '.".', ,
" ·.·.SOMEVIEWSOFSANSKRITGRAMMARIANS;:,. 21 . ' .","' .. '
- - - -------_._-----\
numbers have different suffixes. The number of the case is seven. Each
Grammarians believ
case denotes different Karakas. The concept of Karaka : The case suffixes are joined to -;wr according to the Cf51'Nli
Bhart~hari
says-
fsp4 10 11<1 \1=i
Ha:rJl
.::Ill
t
objects to whom they are joined. The way in which the speaker cognises
Every object is a
the world and he represents it in a sentence is responsible to decide the
Bhartchari's view in the f( in terms of its capacity 1
if,I"-hi
to the way the speaker relates the objects to the action. The Cf51{Cf5i<1 can be said as the relation between the objects and the action. Etymologically, "Cf5T&l means doer Cf)"{rfu {j«hI'Cf5'"! that which brings about. Pal)ini has not defined . Nagesha says
fui-m
Ht54Ie:
i!31{Cf5i<1,"! [That which helps in the accomplishment of the action is "Cf5T&lj. .' . . Bhartrhari uses the word ~ (means) for Kiiraka.
~ction, while everything all actions and processE . powers of the ultimate r' with powers to producE object is a bundle of pOI That is why the obj~cts differently. One and th
There are six
different powers as 'iIC
the instrument (Cf5<:UT) the Recipient (w:qqR) the Point of departure
water through pot] ~ action of seeing, a pov
(~) and the Abode (~). These are the six Karakas.
The Karakas are, as such, the Agents Cf5nf of some action-main or subordinate: The Karakas
have some process or other and the totality
carrying, a power·of be of pouring, a power 01
of the process is cognised as the main action of the sentence. As
tielieves that the ~.
and ~ express the similar meaning that of 'doer', the difference is
this
that all the Kiirakas are the Agents as far as their subordinate action
the objects:
is concerned; but when different processes are cognised in one act of cognition, then these agents are considered as different doers as the Agent q;nf the Object q;-,f the Instrument Cf5
'1"T
I
is also a powe
In Pataiijali's wore '1>"1<'11<;14: ~
different processes e.g. In the process ~ (kills) <JI1, mrur, 0fCUT, ~
According to Sam
etc. a~e the karakas (doers) and the
They are described a
trJ;r: ~ (Rama Kills) mrur: ~ (RavalJa is killed),
The Agent ~ :
0fTUTll:
~ I (arrow
kills), ~: ~. (the battle-field kills) etc. But when they all come in one sentence like <JI1: m-uT ~ ~~: I (Raina kills RavalJa with an arrow in the battle field). the-il·they are .looked upon as different Karakas. Thus, the objects gain . Cf5IWi
Panini says~ the K~rakas is <mr\"-t
~-mT.s~ Cf5
in the sentence. /~'.
-.'
·22:
: SOMEVIEWSOFsANSKRrrGRAMMARIANS ... ..•.
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRrr GI
he case is seven. Each
Grammarians believe that the power that lies within the object is qmqi"
Bhartrhari says-
Ncr
g to the
~
the speaker cognises ;ponsible to decide the
Every object is a bundle of powers, Subramania Iyyer shows
1
, joined to;wr according Iction. The
""'l:
I (Va.III.7.1)
Bhartrhari's view in the following words "Any object in the word is defined in terms of its capacity to participate inthe accomplishmentof various action, while everything in the universe, all living beings, all objects and all actions and processes are the products of theworking of the infinite
that which brings lays w,m f.:I tSq I q
· powers of the ultimate reality, these products in their turn, are em:lowed
of the action is 5R5]. .
· object is a bundle of powers, The power within the objects is the means.
with powers to produce various kinds of effects (Bhartrhari' P23). An That is why the objl:)cts which have fixed characters can be presented
cIT)
the object (1f),
Point of departure ;ix Karakas. 1
f some action-main ::Jther and the totality· e sentence. As
differently. One and the same object can be manifested through its different powers as '<1i 'l~
this
'!"T
is also a power which is a distinguishing mark (~ amongst
the objects. In Pataiijali's words
according to their
mur, O!TUT,
n=.,.l'+,. ~"<";l,'"
) in the sentences
~ ~ I (arrow 'len they
all come
Rama kills RavaQa I upon as different the role they play
According to Sanskrit grammatical tradition, there are Six Karakas. They are described as follows:1 The Agent ~ : PaQini says~ q;af (Pa.1.4;S4) thai which is independent amongst· the Karakas is
ISKRITGRAMMARIANS•.•
"
moijva\~9 object (~1
... ,
.:.:::.;:
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT GRAMMARIANS.,:· ·:23:;· .
..
"
.'
'.'~-.:
.'~'
is independent is cncIT. If the action of the bowl is intended by the speaker through the VRt., then we get a sentence ~
According to Sansk
~ is viewed
(1) Product (f.rcl
as independent. If the action of Devadatta is independent then we get a sentence ~ ~ ~. Here ~ is not independent.*14
(2) Modificatior
tRffir.
KauQcjabha!\a (following Patafijali) says 'Wld;;;;Q
'q
~~
that which is the performer of the action of the said VRt is independent ~ That Karaka becomes Agent
<not
(3) destination
The~~ il
whose action is being told by
has it, it is not to bE
the VRt. So.~, :s.rfT.:r, dO¥I: are the <not of ~ ~ 31fl';r: ~ and, d 0o/1l: ~ Nagesha gives the definition of ~ as d;r ~
the material cause i:
-'1lT<1-~-&l141{1~ 'ti1<:fUTl'! in~. pg. 316) [That
action cannot be SE
$
(He cooks rice) Her
(Agentivity) which is the performer of the action of
'1JI:(lfwclRI I (he gOE
the said VRt.] He quotes Bhartrhari's view to support his definition as
of the original sente
m~ R«f ~ $
~ I (on 'ti1#R't>41'1l'l:. in tW111'. pg.
Par:Jini has made
316) [The Agentivity is expected of that Karaka whose action is. represented through the saidVRt.] According to Sanskrit grammarians,
~l"OCf-¢11 \'ti.J'ti 1°1111 fa 1
(object) has
the $ is told (~) by the verb. So the noun which represents q;o\- becomes i'lIRli'lR'ti and gets W-l'1T (first case suffix) according to the aphorism i'lIRl4R'ti10R<1ifI4fl:liI0ICl'i'Hlil~ ~ I (pa~ 2.3.46). When is not directly told by the verb then it gets ~ (third case the $ . suffix) according to the apho':is~ (31'1]<"1\)
l!>Sf)'I{"4d@llj, (pi eg. ~ftCE :w>T 'T ll'1<1@ I [Lord Krish there are two typel intransitive. Nagesa folloWS.:
The Object ¢If : PaQini has given the definition of (ifilt) as <6
'·T<6l-fq;«.T "-T q ~~&I 141{Cl 1'Cl'tiii'l'l
m q-~l:Ifu I (Janaka sees a picture).
[When two mea
Janaka is the Agent i.e. he is the performer of the action of seeing, but some object must be required to be seen in the fulfillment of the
Ka rakas then it is ~ one i'!>Ri'!> only then i
action of seeing. In that respect, 'chitra' is the most desired object which is be'ing seen by the Agent. So N:r is the object or the ¢f\¢I# of
¢+\fOi fu<\1m (pa 2.: case suffixes.
this sentence. Iyyer in 'Bhartrhai' says that 'The Object is what the main agent seeks most to attain by hisaction.(P.301) Nagesha says th.e
The Instrument (q;
an action)] e.g. in the sentence ~
definition of Karma as ~ ... ~... ~.~ &l141'Iwil"'"l ~ 'WlT'lI'1ii'1lj,
m«Rf
2~~~ I [Thaikaralql. which is produced directly by the
Panini has said which is the most u~
main meaning (~~.cm'l"8""~)f~.aciion and which is expressed through the subordina,te\tiQ1meaning 9ffne said '1lT<1is known as <6+f.]
as q;<:OT-or instrumel
24
SOMEvrEWS OF SANSKRIT G
.SOMEvrEws OF SANSKRIT GRAMMARIANS...
1tended by the speaker
According to Sanskrit grammarians
qqfu. ~ is viewed iependent then we get
(3) destination
lid VRt is independen; tction is being told by fIC'ft qqfu ~ qqfu
<not
as ffif
(~)
The ~ q;4 the effect of the
wpn
'lC'nr. pg. 316) [That
action cannot be seen or inferred. e.g. ~ (he studies vedas), '1Jl{liQ~lqRt I (he goes near to a city etc.) In causal sentences the Agent
rmer of the action of port his definition as 1'6Q ol'J, in \:J('f11.pg.
of the original sentence becomes - an object of the causal sentence. p):j'oini has made two aphorisms for this lTft.T~lfU-T"Tr<"-T<.THFTT~f ~~-<'I>'"I\<'I>4<'1>lol/'"IfOl 'if ult I (Panini 1.4, 52) and
ka whose action is tnskrit grammarians, In which represents suffix) according to (pa. 2.3.46). When ,ts ~ (third case
(!>Sl'lF!1ct{f i.e. transitive .and ~q; i.e .. intransitive. Nagesa gives the definition of ~ and ~ as . . follows.:
Hq; ..fq;r<"-T ~T tp~Ti'.<'TRTq;~T<'''TT''TT"{('TT~Tq;«'FT "
1e Agent (to perform
I and tp~T-"H"TFTT ~-6QIQI{qloq<'l>«1'J, ::Ij<'l>4<'1>«1"t I (on ~ in ~. pg. 148)
:tka se.as a picture). l action of seeing, e fulfillment of the lsired object which Ir the <'I>4<'1>1~<'I> of
[When two meanings of ~-~ & ~ reside in two different Karakas then it is ;g<'l>+\<'I> transitive and when both of them reside in one q;T{q; only then it is ~-intransitive.] According to Panioi 's sOtra q;+\<'I>I{<'I> takes\"i;;<1I
rcaddl'i 'Plf (1.4.49)
I
(~Tq;T<.t)
(2) Modification
?!"i'q~~
of
of three types:
(1) Product(~)
not independent. *14
1
'Plf is
~t is what the main
Jagesha says th.e
~wpn-~
L
The Instrument
Panini hasSaid~~{The most efficient accessory}. That . .. . . .. which is the most usefoFill.the·accQmpiishment of an action is known .. . . , ' '. . . as ~-or instrument·· ." -
ld directly by the thich is expressed is known as 'Plf.] 'SKRITGRAMMARIANS•••
(~)
'
-
,"
""
,"
~'
,::
'.'
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT GRAMMARIANS... . 25
,'"
,"
become an adobe of iIIT or object is known as : rice in the pot in (his) hOI '
Bhartrhari gives its definition as f$r;UIUI: qj):Rtl1fft~ ~ ClIIQI{lct ~;:hH,"! I fuq~~
(RT
~ II (Va.1I1.7.90)
The action is accomplished with the help of various means. But the action is accomplished immediately after the activity of one of the Karakas. That Karaka, immediately after whose activity, the action is accomplished. is known as ~-instrument. Nagesa defines it as ~ - ClIIQI{IClIq~ - ~ - 1"ltl1Ic;'l'liCl 'l'l{OliClli I (on 'l'll{'l'l '"l'(iqup:[ in 1:fi"P1.
.
~.
.
~
.
The Recipient (UPAGI"1 Compared to other and ~ are weakel q;{Uf
and ~ becG
pg. 345) [The instrumentality is that after whose own activity the action is acomplished without any interference].
actions as ~ ~ dependence mixed wit! and~. In ijil&lOll4
e.g. W1: mo'R mrut ~ I (Rama kills RavaQa with an arrow). Here immediately after the activity of the arrow (0[l1JT) the action of ~ to kill"
is not able to become meaning is changed.1
is accomplished. The 'l'l{OliCl is expressed through wf\m Pcn:rfu; according to the sOtra '1'11<'h{oI41{<jc1l41 (Pa. 2.3.18), This third case denotes both
karakas ? There is ar that which helps in the Recipient ({iPA<;I'1) an
(Agent) and ~ (instrument) In u*r mo'R CfRifr W: (Vali is killed by Rama with an arrow). Rama is an Agent and arrow (q]Uf) is an instrument
The Recipient (~
after whose activity the action is accomplished. The Abode
~~
: PaQini has given the definition of
~
as ~Sfu'l'l":UI,"! I (1.4.45). The abode is called ~ What is the abode? That which is the abode of the action remained in Agent (
Panirii has givel (p§.1.4.32)That whict' is the recipient. Tradit of giving. ~ ~ The Action of giving h
m
e.g u;;:rr ~ G< the action of giving, 1 given and the perso much more restricted
<'R; ~ (sits on the mat) and ~ ~ (cooks in the bowl)
According to Bhartrhari the abode does not hold the action itself but holds the Agent or the Object which expresses the Action (C4T'ffi) or Result (of T:fXif) the Action. ~'15 Nagesa gives tlie definition of ~ as omf 'l'l+f &'R'fi - ~' - ~ 3'!fu'l'l{OfiCl'i T (on'l'lI;j¢~W{UJ<J: in 1:fi"P1. pg. 366) [To ;.:. . -. . ..
, 26"'"
as Karaka,
"s6MEVIEWSOFsANSKRrrGRAMMARIANS, ..
to only one action-th has made other SOt liked, and its synony sweets) So the mWU" !>!IU"1101: I (1.4.32) of 'H l'>;\ <; 1'1 '"! as USM 1'1 '"! I (on
?sn '<'f)i<
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRrr (
--------~--~.---~----.~----
become an adobe of
tlI"[1:[R"
(action) and 1:P<.'f (Result) through the Agent
or object is known as ~] e.g. ~ ~
11.7.90) rious means. But the ~tivity of one of the
rice in the pot in (his) house). According to Pal)inian sOtra ~ ~
~ (P.a.2.3.16) the ~ takesqmq; ~ or the seventh case-suffixes. The Recipient ({14J>l~1'1) - & The Point of departure (:014I~I'1) Compared to other karakas (Le.
Ictivity, the action is a defines it as ~ , I(<j) R'b q-.rp::[, in 1:f(¥f. In
activity the action
lJ%" ~ (he cooks
~ & ~) f14J>1GI'1
and 31"GTGH are weaker. It is defined above that
d«(il,(<j)+t So ~,
~ and 31Ti~ become
actions as :~ ~
dependence mixed with independence. That is not the case with f14J>1GI'1 and 31"GTGH. '111. i11liU olI
is not able to become
) action of ~ to kill
meaning is changed. Then, how {14J>1GI'1 and
1m' ~ ac;ording
as ~: ~ (Brahmin gives). The whole ~,
karakas ? There is another definition. of qmq;
rnxrr
case denotes both
R4ct
ft W:
Recipient ({14J>lGI'1) and the point of departure (~) are considered
(Vali is killed
iITUf) is an instrument
as
are considered as
as Karaka. The Recipient (,(14J>l~1'1) :
!finition' of ~
~
Wh<;lt is the ned in Agent ('Pi1t) d the object must hat something on )wn as toe Abode. .-,,-,.
Pal)ini
has given its definition as ",;IGI'1'"!,
(pa.1.4.32) That which is meant to be reached with the' help of the object is the recipient. Traditionally {P>;IGI'1 is taken in the sense of the action ~ ~ ~ {f(f'¢1'(¢"1 {l<>;(GI'1"1 ~ ~ of giving. ~ , " ~IO The Action of giving has been done for whose sake is known as {l<>;(GI'1+t e.g
U;Jff
fmrr<:r 11i
~ [A king gives a cow to
a brahmin].
Here in
the action of giving, three participants are needed, the giver, the thing given and the person to whom it is given. The Karaka f1<>;(GI'1+t has much more restricted sense than any other Karaka, because it is applied to only one action-the action of giving. To extend its application, Pal)ini e action itself but . 'ction (Cl/T1ffi) or
has made other Sotras to include in {l<>;(GI'1+t for the root
~
to be
liked and its synonyms e.g. i111((loim .~ ~ (The brahmin likes sweets) So the iIIT((l1lT becomes {l lO>;iG 1'1 "I according to the sOtra.~~~
q;.:f Im
!Jl;(G 1'1"1 as @;£II"1 I ~ q;<=f
thi;,N~geSh f(""l'q..£:IT£("
has given the definition . ~
{l<>;(GI'1+t I' (on ¢1{¢R'b'1Ul1'r.in ,t(Bl1; pg;347}. KRITGRAMMARIANS...
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT GRAMMARIA.~S::.··27:
'
,
[That Karaka which is meant to be reached through the 'Object' of any action (RP<1llil';1 and not only by the action of root GT) is known as
,
+l+>;ic;H'"!j e.g. in ~1i.llUII<1 'Ii c;c;rfu I ~ is meant to be reached by the object
in senSe. So in,l'.frCfil: ·3 from the running horse] ,
~ [Chaitratells a story to Maitra] if-;r is meant to be reached by
it is stable or '1iCf'J: in It are a:r~. aod WlT: fr' horse. The action of fal
the object "CiTi!l. of the action of telling ('I>'<0i"1RP
is the starting pOint of t of its being running. Nag,
+l +>;ic;I'1'l is that which is '!leant to be reached by the object, then
q;1· ~(1
how can it be in intransitive roots, which have no object at all, and even then, +l+>;ic;I'1"( is found in intransitive roots like ~ ~ I [He
(on q;WBf.1i4U1"( in '«' action «(1(1, - (1(1, - fi.F;
prepares for the battle]. In such cases Patafijali says 'that even action (i.e.
&
- q;iJO~lli (111) and that wh
can be
":nc-
looked upon as an object (q;4) in the technical sense (PsMIlt1 . ~
~ (2.:3.28) 3i4l'GT'1' gl
stages. (1) seeing (2) Mentally desiring (3) deciding and (4) resolving to do it. Each previous act becomes a technical Karma (~q;4)
~fq:
for the succeeding one, So in the visible act of getting ready is intended (~) for the battle, so it becomes 'H+>;ic;H according to its. original
The function of the! them to come to a sin£ . i.e. all the remaining CI
definition. For such cases, Nagesha gives another definition as ~ RP;ic;H(i:i"( (on q;1~q;f.1{i~ in tWrli". pg. 351) [Th~t which
doers. They are directl between the objects ar
is meant to be reached 'by ~ or intra(1sitive actions is known as +l+>;ic;H.] He gives its illustration as ~~m I' ~~~ '11~q;I
..m.r:
relation betwen two obj down) There are more t
I (on q;1~f.1'6qul,"! in tWrli". pg. 351)
from which ~-~,
By this definition, the over expansion of the four mental stages in transitive actions, too, is restricted. So there will not be any :ilC;'1I<1
Patafijali says ~Tq me &
for 31Tc;;t ~ That +l+>;ic;H lc;I~ (pa. 2.3.13)
4"Ifu
There the Karaka relat Patafijali ~N means nOI it is not q;n:q) it follol
The Point of Departure (alQIGI'1) : PMini has given its definition ~qliQlil.sQlc;H"(1 (Pa.1.4.24) that· which is stable in the action of seperation is called quf
~QIc;H,"!
e.g.
is why it is counted as
<J:~-1Rl:
mr.
~ (the leaf falls dow~ from the tree). The action of departure
inactive. This stable object is the starting pOintef the action of seperation.
28
ifi~Ctjv~~hould not be taken
~.
implies a
Agent and Recipient, b is implied is ~fq. The pi
is accomplished by the two partiC:ipa~ts, from whJch one is stable or The starting point which is ~tablE~ or
but that wh
of seperation is known c
q;4). He thinks that all the actions are preceded by four purely mental
~]
<1
lingers somewhat. in p
rigidly
·sOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT GRAMMARIANS...
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT GRA
L.
._._ . _____ -....11
,
--~-----~-
in senSe. So inmcRf: .3'[m<J: ~ 3l~: [The horse-rider falls down from the running horse] 3l'lI gets 31q\c;I'i~ though 3l'lI is mcRf: (running), it is stable or ~
action «f(f - (f(f - fit;~) which is related to the Agent (~ - ~ -
but that which is the performer (3lT~T<:[) of the action
of seperation is known as 31q\C;I'i~l. According to PaQinian Sutra ~ ~ (2.3.28) ~ gets ~ ~ -or the fifth case suffixes.
liN: The function of the sixth case are many and it is difficult to generalize them to come to a single definition and hence PaQini has said ~ liN i.e. all the remaining come under the sixth case. The karakas are· the doers. They are directly related to the vefb. The Kiiraka is a relation between the objects and the action whereas the Genitive denotes. the relation betwen two objects e.g.
Patanjali says ~T1Sf means ~~-TT e.g. in mT:~: there can be a ~ 'I1TQ. Instead of saying uw WTll c;qrfu it is said mT: W: . There the Karaka relation is not intended (~10). So according to Patanjali ~N means-nan-intention of showing ~ relation. Though it is not it follows or rather it involves a relation, that is why it is counted as a seventh Karaka.*17
mT: ~: implies a previous relation: of master and servant as the Agent and Recipient, but it is not meant;ilo is not implied at all. So what status offit;
.
-
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRrr GRAMMARIANS..
-29
.
.-----
so it is looked uflon as Karaka. Otherwise its relation with the action is remote.·'18 A.ccording to Nagesa ~is <:f5RC!> !>IITdqfc;ChI:a- - 6QTdfu£: «r-~ "fG~;q:
t[1i3<:IT
(on Chj{Chf.'!'(;'l"l'! in "IBl'f. pg. 373)
[The re.lation apart from the meanin'g of I'IIR1qR;Ch and
~<'W'(In=t'l'lTif etc. is denoted by ~ the Genitive.] He considers geniiive different from the Karaka. Thus, the sixth case stands for the relation between two objects which is remote as far as the action is concerned. The motivation of the Speaker: The motivation of the speaker is one of the imp'ortant aspects of the Deep Structure. It decides the role of the object in the sentence. The way . .in which the speaker cognises. tbe action and the way he represents it in a sentence is an important factor to .determine the ChI{Ch<"q of the object. A grammarian 'q~,i\f'i'"i says fuq~f1a: ChI{<'hllUl
mrRr I [The karakas (take
place) according to the motivation of the speaker]. It depends upon the. mode of cognition of the speaker and his intention to present it. These two the mode of the cognition and the intention of the speaker-determine the domain-the range of the objects to move in the predicate. fuq~-lT means ~ ~ (Speaker's desire). PaQini has not used
the word fuq~ but from its sGtras, it seems, that he knows how fuq~-lT affect on the Syntacticlevel.·~has used the word fuq~-lT in its primary sense. All the karakas are the Agents -{<'hOt) of their minor (own) actions. They are independent as far as their minor(own) actions are concerned, but as soon as they enter into the main action they are dependent on the main action. The change of the independent Karaka depends upon the speaker's will. .If he chooses '
~ qofu. [(He) reads a ~6bk}a!1d ~ ~
[a book is (being) read].
So which object is tobeJQcussedor which object is going to become an Agent is
depend~ritonthe ~pe~ker"s 'rri6tivaticin fuq~-lT. *19 •
....... :." ••
~
'"0
:.
. '
,-
.'
.·-30'" i$OI!olEV1EWS OF SANSKRIT GRAMMARIANS...
,I.
I
ation with the action
~~'IT and ~ goes together-3li1:r'UFf means agreement. The
lRlR'di: «r-~
word with whom the verb agrees becomes ~ (directly told). The speaker has to give independence (+
Jg, 373}
wants to
~ and Cf5Rq) as e considers genitive 3nds for the relation action is concerned,
make~.
it is a grammatical relation-concord of the suffixes
of person, number and gender.*20 ~~{f or the motivation lies in the mind of the speaker. The case-
suffixes help to convey the motivation to the listener. It can be said that the word with whom the verb agrees is a motivated independent (.~) object. In~: ~
mant aspects of the e sentence. The way ty he represents it in ~
of the object. .
e:CfGTI and
~ shows that
e:CfGTI:
tRIfu I the agreerllent between
e:CfGTI is motivated as 31'tcR: ,~ I ~ is not
is 31f~.
an independent (~) one. But in ~qq~'1
a motivated object. So it is 31~ Thus N
I [The karakas (take
of the motivation of the speaker, When the speaker wants to focus on the Agent, he uses active type of construction, and where he wants to focus
t depends upon the
on the object he uses passive type of construction.
to present it. These !
speaker-determine predicate ..
IQini has not used e knows how fuq~{f I fuq~{f in its primary
Comment: ,
Jns are concerned, are dependent on aka depends upon mt q;nf of Qd'1R!>"1I lad) but if not then . In the same way lk is (being) read]. ; going to become fuq~{f.*19 NSKRrr GRAMMARIANS...
.
four types of fuq~ The nominative case (g~) in Sanskrit indicates subjects. Any object which the speaker wants to make subject of a sentence, takes nominative case
inor (own) actions.
'
According to Sanskrit Grammatical tradition, it seems, that there are
(g~)
(~1""ql'1)
So the 'object having any relation (except the Recipient
and the point of departure (~) which are already discussed
above in detail]. can become the subject of the sentence according to the speaker's motivation. e.g. ~: 31fu';n fu;:ffir I [Devadatta cuts with a sword] can also be said as 31fu: fu;:ffir [the sword cuts] if the speaker wants to make 31fu the subject. The Karakas have heirarchy aCCQrdingio.the salience they have in the sentence. The agent is the highest one., It is called
'I>ill in
Sanskrit. ,
Then comes the object ~q;if). The othe'rsarejhe Indirect object, the
"'/
. : .' :. . . , .: ...... ,..:
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRrr GRAMMARIANS~i. ,'31'·', ' '
Recipient {iP1"i1'1 and then the oblique object, the Instrument (~),
The order can be seE
the abode and the paint of departure (dlQI"iI'1). Sometimes the Agent
(1) (2)
~
(3)
~~
So the Object is promoted to. fill the place of the Agent and is made
(4)
~~
the subject e.g. ~: ~ qofu
(5) (6)
:mmU5~
(7)
~:
is not motivated and it is demoted. The PassivEl constructions are the best examples of the demotion. The Agent is demoted to oblique object. (Devdatta reads a book) and ~:
. ~ ~ (A book is being read by Devadatta), Sometimes the Agent is demoted upto ~Tq (Genitive) e.g. ~BT ~ This process can be said as the demotion of the karakas. The karakas can be demoted according to the motivation of the speaker. As against this, the other process is of the promotion of the karakas.
<J;'l'1Qlil.~
"i
ill
I
Moreover, there is a First of all, Pa(1ini gi g 'U'l'1Qlil5Qlql'1'1... e.. is (31YIQI'1+j). ~
The karakas can be promoted according to the speaker's motivation. T[qf
'It
1:!
q'Mlq I (Milch the cow (for) the milk)
In causal sentences too the motivation of the speaker plays an important role e.g. ~: 1:f"'i'lfu I (Devadatta cooks) and ~: gm I (Yagnadatta makes him to do so) ~: ~ ql'
e.g.~~:(1. 'protection from danger called ~l Then for the VRts , case of· the verb ~ . unbearable, is called " . Lastly for some pre [And that karaka v
performer of the action.
of the special relation~
The system of Sanskrit grammar:
/
Then he gives anol'
First of all he giv,
There is a typical order of karakas in Pa(1ini's Grammar. According
VRts. and then he giv
to the metarule (~) ~ .. \'<1'N 'It ~ the succeeding aphorism is more powerful than the preceding one. As has already been seen above,
given rules according'
that the point of departure (dlQI"iI'1) and the recipient flP1QI'1 are the
suffixes are connecte
weaker karakas in a sense, that they are not directly involved with an action. They cannot become ~ (directly told) by the motivation
dimensions : (i) The role the obj
of the speaker. So the karakas are in the following order. The point of
(ii) The motivation
departure. (3NIGR") ill). . The Abode (~) < The Object (q;+f)".< .The. ....Agent .
(iii) The conventi,
.
The objects are re
used in the ~
,"
32··
·S.OIV!EVIEWS OF SANSKRIT GRAMMARIANS... ..
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRIT GI
le Instrument (~),
The order can be seen here:
). Sometimes the Agent 'e' constructions are the mated to oblique object. the Agent and is made lads a book) and ~:
(1 )
~
(1-4-23)
(2)
y;cPlql~ dlqlqH'l, I
(1-4-24)
(3)
~ ~ fI" W'>IqH'l, I.
(1-4-32)
(4)
~~I ,
(1-4-42)
(5)
(1-4-45)
(6)
:ommTo~ I <'!l4{l \1;(@1 sj <'!l'f I
(7)
~:qmfl
(1-4-54)
), Sometimes the Agent cnfu This process can irakas can be demoted
(1-4-49)
Moreover, there is a special order in the rules of karakas. First of all, Pa(1ini gives a general semantic rule.
amotion. of the karakas.
e.g. ~cll"lqliloqlql'1'l, (That which is stable in the action of seperation
speaker's motivation. can also be said as
!
is (31QlqH'l,». .. Then he' gives another sOtra according to the meaning of some VRt. e.g. ~ ~: (1-4-25). [In the case of words implying 'fear' and 'protection from danger' that from which the danger or fear proceeds is
the speaker plays an (s)and~: ~ I
called
ql'
~j
Then for the VRts alongwith the prefix e.g. Q{I;jj{{11: (1.4.26) [In the
r I (Yagnadatta makes a be looked upon as an' 'f the action of cooking wants to represent the
case of the verb ~ to be tired to weary of that which becomes unbearable, is called 31"Cf[Cl'R} Lastly for so'me process, if any e.g. ~. (1-4-51) (for causal) [And that karaka which is not spoken at as coming under anyone of thespecJal relations of oblation etc., is also called karmaj. First of all he gives general rules, which can be applied to many VRts. and then he gives rules for some special VRts. Thus, Pal)ini has given rules according to the meaning and constructions.
Grammar. According ;ucceeding aphorism ~dy been seen above, )ient fi"'AqH are the ctly involved with an
The objects are related to the action with case-suffixes. These casesuffixes are connected to the objects according to the following three dimensions:
:I) by the motivation . ~ order. The point of l·lnstrument (~) <
(i) The role the objects 'play in the performance of the action (Karaka) . (ii) The motivation of the Spaker (fcrq~1T) (iii) The conventional rules applied according to the lexical items
!hi (q;af).
used in ttie sentence.· (~ ~)
,ANSKRrr GRAMMARIANS:.. . .
SOMEVIEWS OF SANSKRrr GRAMMARIANiL. .
... L
33 .
r "
The Kiiraka Principle:
qtl:S
The role the objects piay in the performance of an action (~) is
us~d in the sentence, th
al ready discussed in detail. The Karaka concept is based on the cognitive
to the object e.g. ~
~ "1+"!{0<'f):(l1
process of the human brain and its representation into the sentence.
~ [Swaha to AgniJ
Pal)inihas not discussed its theoretical back-ground in detail, but the later grammarians like Pataiijali,
Bhart~hari,
illustrations.
Nagesa etc. have described
Sometimes the ~
and discussed in detail.
also allow some particul
The concept gives general rules: (2) <'f)'1'~R'-"1 <1 iFI.
,
<'f)11
<'f)<=f I promotes the ob
(1.4.49)
I
(1 ) ~: qm\-I
(1.4.54) }
(3) ~~I
(1.4.42)
(4)
iliA
0 !liPi
fmifu {"! 11'11<-; H11
(1.4.32)
~
fu:iftm
I
in lR': ~ ~'tif [Lord r
(2.3.2)
in ~: ~ui 3ifu~Rf I <'f)~<'f){UI'41qd')'41
'~m (W,w'!
that the original root sJigt
(2.3.18)
meaning aspect, is cone
(2.3.13)
Karaka relation with tI to the "1T'i (1-4-46). Ac
(5) 'J>q+iql~6qlqH,"! I
(1.4.24)
~~
(2.3.22)
(6) ~6fu<'f){UI'l, I
(1.4.45)
A~
(2.3.36)
which can be treated as
This principle (i.e. Karaka (concept) has the greatest field of application . . The motivation of the speaker: . The concept of f
.'
.. :. : ".
>~/). '. '" ,-34. \s6MEViEWSOFSAN;S!
"
....
'
.
....
SOME.vI~WS OF SANSKRfr-GRA
... - - - - - - -
q~&
an action (&
)und in detail, but the
used in. the sentence, then invariably the fourth case suffixes are joined to the object e.g. ~ ;:r1'[: [pay obeisance to Indra], otherwise it is ~ "1Ji",:q;",lfct [he worships Indra] ~ ~ [Vasat to Indra], ~ ~ [Swaha to Agni] ct-il"'R.f: «r'aT [Swadha to Gods] etc. are its
sa etc. have described
illustrations.
based on the cognitive ion.into the sentence.
Sometimes the ~s or the prefixes which are joined to the VRt also allow some particular case suffixes only. The rules like m~~
q;-.f I promotes the object like ~I
in (R": ~ ~lit [Lord resides in the Vaiku(ltha]. and becomes object
(2.3.2)
in lR':
'Q1~in'Ql
(2.3.18)
FW-;I~
(2.3.13)
~~UQ which are otherwise 3lfuq;~
ft'§ui
3lfu~ra- I [Lord resides in the. Vaiku(ltha] It is probable
that the original root slightly differs from the root having prefix as far as the . meaning .aspect. is concerned and that different root requires different
(2.3.22)
Karaka relati.on with. the object. Thus the case suffixes are joined to the ""1ll1 (1-4-46). According to ~ ~ - the exceptional cases
(2.3.36)
which can be treated as conventional rules.
he greatest field of
speaker is aiready
•
uctionof a sentence. represents it in the cess of sentencing. to the object which
to the conventional .",
11 items used in the
:
«r~~nm:qmc;t
INS!
'".
. SOME.VlfJlYS()FSANSKRfl'GRAMMARi..;ils;.. ,.:35'.::-'
'·. • 1·:······
.
REFERENCES:
1 Bhartrharisays -
&1{'"lqtlJ\f!l tlli'i:'"l<'1l"ti fq~R'H('1,"! I ~ {~4~iil"tl'"lfufuti- WPT~ffi II (
;or ~
Psn
~w I\t;('1
9
:mq-
~ RB4 Iii1 Pc! fi'l WsR'l1
l
He says
I
wrmr 1:R'm
m~~ ~1:II'W'41 I
¥
Bhartrhari has
the second persons.
~ '1lil4'"lr
m
8
;n;JO(ICl41 ~
3 In Patafijali 's words -
~RJi<';(OII"l;o;jOI
rrc;:
2 ~"q' "fcifrfn'lIJIJI('1Sb'1TlJ.l'ifur 311@m\lM~m ~
7
[Thus the first and t
'l'lClfu
~.l
~ I.
10 In (ij"J,W"t;I'l ,,'lii ~ r& tI'
4 In its ~ it is said ,Sb'"l tI rl i ~1 UII"t I il li{\'1J'i i l.'l~"W l.'l "l1\t;~
,11
Patafijali
has
~~ '1Gl
Yaska hal) also said
0li' ~
cJ,c:rfqft~<'i 'HTC[lfT~'-TT(-T"l ~r'<.T~
crqf'rT
I
~ ",I I'd ~~T ~CTSb11'YT~fu
31qqJfq4~ I
5
Bhat!oji in his ~m"
Cfi(ij&llqH
RIB: 'f1flT:
I
13 Bhartrhari has
q;c;f mwi &llql{fu1:s'~ fu~~ II 6
Patafijali
UIt>4i4 UWPi4
says for the present tense -
!>I'J"t1f!lI~{lil ~1I\.flrl&l1 ,~'I '
(~ is an oid terminology for the present tense).
SOMEVIE;WS OF SANSKRrfG,R
36 ,. ' SOMEVJEWS O~ SANSKRIT GRAMMARIANS ...
. '1',' '
ifRi ~ffi4iFI I
WPT~m
II
7
~~~ I
8
3lUllmctC'1i T('1"~~ '1I"'11C;41 RlI{I:
(C!T.~.n\l)
~ ~ ~ II
9 Bhartrhari has used the word ,
(va.1 :3)
w:lUif and ~ for the first and
the second persons.
p;rr
~
(pa.3.3.161)
&;
Rl p.q f
He says
I
>flWT 1+l oIl: I
ct
.raFIl-i141 II (in 'F~T of
CIT.q.lfhl ~)
IR its commentary it is said that
~I{flliHI~
1f.J 10 In C'1>foN;;I",ii5\~ it is stated 'l1l"C!T ~ "fIT ~C'1I~oliiQcl UtSliC;PiC;.m {lIl'lHIR.l{o
....
i!
f')fl;'""Ci.I""lm'llTll,\1di::Tcl::l-;:\ fl; i.I "
q OJ '€I OJ il OJ ::I (fj ,Iii: I
11 Patafijali has said:
~ ~ ~. I·
f
~['<>""
~~~~~'!Ol~ctll 12
"I" ~ ¢11lr
:mq
~ T.f
13 Bhartrhari has said.Ult;4i
Ult;
m:rr
I
~ ~~TOGRt 1:fcl" ~ ~ II (Va.1.55)
lent tense).
SANSKRfTGRAMrilARIANS...
SOMEviEWSOFSANSKRfl'GRAMMARIANS;.,.
...L....._... _
37·.
14 In Pataiijali's words
\ref ~
<m
~
q;-~ ~ W
~ Q{iI""Il
.z
(with special n
(q;-IN'I~q;-'1)
The best way of 100 The way in which they di of a sentence has three can be three different r
15 Bhartrhari says =l"'\1
CHAPTER-2 ~
[
q;+f &lClR;
3qq>4i1 lSB
m c:cnfu
~ ':;1'1lSB
ll't
~ ijilt;J 0 ll C;HlSB
'
(1)
The Lexical IV
~ ~ ~';jcnd41: ~ ~~'q I (on q;-1{q;-f;t'6~
(2)
The Propositi!
(3)
The Contextu
16 Nagesa says-mIT ijil&\Oll4 ~
cmfr
The three dimensi(
in G"Wf. pg. 347)
The Lexical Meaning 1'7 Bhartrhari says
A speech commur ground makes the spec manner according to th knowledge forms a "e: through 'Generic' conc need. This.Generic can a cow as having four its qualities as it gives distinguishes it from tl some what similar .fei 'Generic' concept.
~ ~ortr: ~- cmq; - ~ I 'l!'"'14Ili~
err
lSB414i .mo~ II
and also @<wi>I{¢'i4¢:> ~ q;mf; &ll'€l<\?. ~~
fil
tpr
18 Pataiijalisays am tg mr: ~1;f! l~ {'q-~..crrRmcnPc; {'flO<.i..£:f' ~m ~
W,:c.III),'l'IIClICl4ClICl;qftl14ICl,jjr4J1"1¢1<;1 ~
mmr - Jlriilfl':
G"GTfu -
-
~ ~IPcl¢I{¢,<{li'HICl{:al;qllicqi'lilfl:JRl ~ ~~ ¢@1.
The Propositional N
19 Bhartrhari in his ,mHflli~~T says-
A sentence code
~1ftt>lil';jIf11gf!1 ~~ I fl
"
~"" , ,
" ..." "
RnP-o-'qq:
(1) a situation ar
m-~-«
(2) The participa . e,g, In a sentenc process of'running;in \ The information 90 q
......•...........
. participants conn~d;
.....
: ,:
'.
.'"
.
",
THE MEANING OF TH ,'.
. ;.;
CHAPTER-2 THE MEANING OF THE PASSIVE
I
(with special reference to Sanskrit Active & Passive constructions) The best way of looking to the Passive is to contrast it with the Active. The way in which they differ in meaning and form is significant. The meaning of a sentence has three different dimensions, and these three dimensions can be three different meaning spheres.
.11' 3.4}
~ CfI'iPsn'QICfi+ffW rf1nmr-~ : I
llT
The three dimensions are -
'<'hIT
'~'q I (on CfiHCfif.l'6Qul'"!
(1)
The Lexical Meaning
(2)
The Propositional Meaning
(3) . The Contextual Meaning
The Lexical Meaning :
A speech community has a common cultural background. This background makes the speaker perceive and represent objects in some specific manner according to the culturally-shared knowledge. This cUlturally-shared forms a "Generic'concept. The speaker cognises the object, knowledge . . through 'Generic' concept and analyses and represents it according to his need. This Generic concept is the lexical meaning e.g~ The speaker cognises a cow as having four legs, a taU etc. with its physical features and with its qualities as it gives milk, and so on. But, at the same time the speaker distinguishes it from the other objects like horse, donkey etc. Which have some what similar features. So he distinguishes 'cowness' which is the 'Generic' concept. '
~mm tf~IT: t:mf:' R.T', ~m
- rnmr -
ftrw
<m<:r: I "1 "'"11 Pc; -
~;i;~hr: CfiI~Cfi'"l,
The Propositional Meaning:
A sentence codes specific information which involves two aspects(1) a situation and
Va.III.7.2)
.;
(2) The participants. e,g, In a sentence 'the Car is.running ~n'fhe:,road' the situation is a process of'running; in which the participants'theca;;a,nd 'the road' participate. The information ~dcled into a S~f)~€lr:Jce.~bou!some situation and the ". participants conneci8:d:jo, it is knoWn ;;lSP'roPQsitional meaning. . . <' . ... ". . "'. . ' .. ~
,,".,
INSKRIT GRAMM~RIANS...
.
r
The contextual Meaning:
The controlled static situation is 'State'.
The contextual meaning of an utterance covers a range of various The controlled Dynal
information regarding the status of the utterance, the status of the speaker
situation is 'Process'
and the listener, and the attitudes of the speaker.
The Objects: ,
The syntactic contrast between the Active and the Passive to an extent, reflects discourse functions. This has been seperately treated in the IVth chapter.
'I
I
The Propositional Semantics :-
The above mentione . which participate in t h aI and abstract -e.g.
The function of the propositional semantics is to analyse a proposition
(1) The horse runs
which is syntactically known as a sentence. A sentence codes inf.ormation
(2) Devadatta offer
which involves two aspects of a proposition. (i)
The concrete object:
Its charecterization as State, event or action (the term 'situation' covers
are always dependent fe
these different terms), and
(ii)
The characterization of the participants (arguments, case roles) in the
in a sentence. Sometin by animate objects. Th,
proposition as to their semantic roles vis-a-vis the predicate.
dependent. The object
(Syntax' Vol-1 by T. GivQn.1984 1?31) The Situation :
Asentence ·represerits some·situation. There are only objects in the world. The Situation· is abstract. It is a totality of the various states of one or more objects. e.g. when a sentence is spoken as 'A leaf is falling down
I"
from the, tree' the situation is a process of 'falling down' in which there
Animal
are two participants- 'A leaf and 'the tree'. The 'Situation' can be analysed on two dimensions. Dynamism and control. Independent
Situation
I
Controlled
The static control
I
has slept] The lion h
Static
Dynamic
I
I Uhcontrolled
Controlled
its' position. The stalic uncontr
Uncontrolled'
I Position
State
Acfion '40'
, " Being yellow is
I
Process THE ·MEANING·c\F tHI
THE"MEANII~G o.i=JHE PASSIVE,
,-..", . . ....:_-'- . "
, i
The controlled static situation is 'Position', The uncontrolled static situation is 'State'.
s a range of various status of the speaker
The controlled Dynamic situation is'Action'The uncontrolled Dynamic
i,
situation is 'Process'
~:
Passive to an extent ,
The Objects ; ,
Iy treated in the IVth The above mentioned situations are perceived through various objects which participate in that situation. The objects are of two types concrete and abstract -e.g. tnalyse a proposition ~e
(1) The horse runs (horse-conrete) .
codes information
(2) Devadatta offers prayers (prayer-abstract) erm 'situation' covers
The concrete objects maybe animate or inanimate. The inanimate object are always dependent for a change in their state. Their states are described
ltS, case roles) in the
in a sentence. Sometimes they are made to pass through some process
the predicate.
by animate objects. The animate objects may be independent as well as dependent. The objects can be analysed as follows. Object
I !
only objects 'in the Concrete
arious states of one
Abstract,
\ leaf is falling down Jwn' in'which there )n' can"be analysed
,Animate
Independent
Dependent
Inanimate
Dependent
The static controlled situation is position e.g.
I
ft:W:
~ I [The lion
has slept] The lion has control over sleeping. He is sleeping so,
ynamic
I
~
is
its position. The static uncontrolled situation is 'State' ftw
Uncontrolled'
.fur:
I [The lion is yellow]
Being yellow is not controlled by ,lion. So yellov"ness is its State. Process G o.FTHE PASSIVE
·.i:
...-
f
The controlled Dynamic situation is 'Action'.
r
[Yagnadatta makes [
!
Sometimes because
,i
fut;-o 'T.fRfu I [The lion walks] The lion can control the act of walking. So ~ is an action. The uncontrolled dynamic situation of the object is 'Process' fm;:'~ I [The lion falls down] The lion cannot ~ontrol his being
fallen nown. So the situation.denoted by 1:f<'Ifu is a process.
~ ~
,I
I
. f
super-imposed on' inanir
.
e.g. '{~ ~ I
'~
31fu: fu;:!fu
I I
i
The Participant-Roles:
The Object:
If a sentence has t\O
When the objects participate in a situation they have specific semantic
must be an object. The)
functions.' The functions are known as participant-roles.
The object is that on whi
They are also known as semantic-roles. According to Sanskrit
is the goal of some acti
Grammatical Tradition they are Karakas.
action process. Bhartch:
They are Apent, Neutral, Patient, Result, Attribute, Goal, Source,
(product), ~(modific
Positioner, Location, Instrument, Benefective, Affected. Receipient, Direction,
has given three types a~
Experiencer etc.
more than one objects
We will describe the situation one .by one and taking . the participants . part in it.
Affected:. That entity which gE
The Action:
function of affected.
~' 'iG'1I'1<1n
If an action has only one participant, then that participant must be an Agent.
[A potter brings cI
The Agent:
W1: '{lCI'Tf ~ I
The Agent must be an animate controller, who controls the situation
[Rama kills Ravar,
or who has a power to manipulate other objects to bring about certain
Goal:
expected results. The Agent is independent. According to modern theories the Agent has 4 qualities (1) Control (2) Animacy, (3) Intentionality (4)
That entity to whi,
Responsibility. (J. Lyons 'Semantics Vol II P483) . e.g
function 01 Goal.
~ ~'qcfu I [Devadatta reads a book]
e.g., '
Devadatta has control over the act of reading. He 'reads intentionally. and he is in the
"~,' , :
respori~'ible for the acrof reading. His Agentivity.is not focused
foliowing~en'iEinc€', though .
'~';:-,;',
~~",
he
is the pe~drmeC9fthesame a~tiQn. '. . . ', ";.
42 '
#:fEr.1EJ\.NiNGO~THE PAssiVE
,:r#rni;
Gq~~;. :b'~~ .. ~:
[beVad~ttan ..
'.
":'",
'
.
, "'l'" . ". . ,
.
'".
.:. ,
":...:.:r ': ~':.. ': ,.
<141G"<1: ~ ~ qld<1kl I
[Yagnadatta makes Devadatta read a book]
'rc'lfcr
is an action.
3ct is 'Process' lnot control his being a process:
Sometimes because of the motivation of the speaker, the animacy is super-imposed on inanimate objects to project them as an Agent. e.g.
,-mffi
31fu: fu';,fu
I [The sword cuts]
The Object: lave specific semantic roles. :cording to Sanskrit
If a sentence has two-place proposition then, the second participant must be an object. The Agent and the object are the .nuclear participants. The object is that on which some action or process is performed,or which is the goal of some action or which is brought about as a result ofcsome
ibute, Goal, Source , Receipient, Direction ,
action process. Bhart(hari has given three types of objects ('Plf) as ~ (product), ~ (modification) and
>ITQf (Destination,
Goal). Modernlinguists
has given three types as Affected, Goal and Neutral. A Sentence may have more than one objects together.
Ie par,ticipants taking
Affected: That entity which gets transition, as a result olan action has a semantic participant must be
function of affecled. ~. 'iG'11'14Ri
[A potter brings clay] ontrols the situation bring about certain J to
modern theories
W1:~~1
[Rama kills Ravar;ta]
Goal:
:3) Intentionality (4) That entity to which the action is applied by the Agent has semantic function 'of Goal. look] .e.g ... 'reads intentionally. tivityJs· not focused
~ClG"<1: ~ ~ I
9fth8'$~rn'e action.
[DEivadattareadsc a bookj'
G OFr:THE PAssiVE -: -,
..,-:
.43
The Location : [Mahesha tells a story]
The entity where rests has a semantic fl
Neutral:
too. That entity which is not directly involved in the performance of an action but that which is the part of the meaning of the VRt has a semantic function of Neutral. e.g
mor
e.g.~~ [Devadatta readE
~;r\C;"Ii: ~~t
wi" f+;:ttuRl I
[Yagnadatta cool
[Sita loves Rama] ;q;t1C;"Ii: ~ ~
3'
The source:
I.
The entity from'
[Yagnadatta worships Indra].
of source
When an action has three place proposition, the third participant may have any of the semantic functions of Instrument, Recipient, Location or Source.
The Instrument:
[Rama went to 1
That entity, after whose activity, the action is accomplished has a
~m:~~.
semantic function of Instiument e.g. . "{fl1: ~
ucrut
[sankara broug~
~ 1
An action predi( [Rama kills RavalJa with an arrow]
Participant-role
~~'Ii~1
(1) The Agent
[A potter makes a pot with a wheel]
The Recipient:
(2) The Agent,
Tt"le entity to which an object is transferred has a semantic function (affected)
of Recipient. e.g. -u;;rr ~
iff. Gc;"Tfu
3)
I
The Object
[The king gives a cow to a brahmin]
4)
The Age[lt The Object
[Chaitratells a story to Maitra] 44
The Agent,
THE.
TI:lI; MEANING OF.. THE PASSIVE ."
:
MEAN!NG OF T
,
The Location :
~ lli1
The entity where the performer of the action or the thing performed rests has a semantic function of location. It may come in two-place predicate
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -....- •.•.._.
~ ,~
I
formance of an action s a semantic function
too.
I
e.g. ~qqft: ~
% 'ldfu
. [Devadatta reads a book in (his) home] 4;I1qft:
~~t .:w.ft tRfu I
[Yagnadatta cooks a chapaii in fire] The Source: The entity from which something is removed has semantic function third participant may ~cipient, Location or
of source e.g . .Ul'1: ~~~ (ils·CfiIJOf ~, I "
[Rama went to Lanka from Avadha] ccomplished has a
.~~ ~... Jls·JIlJOf 3lqctctl~ .I ... ",-
[sankara brought down the Ganges from the heaven] An action predication has following participant roles. Participant-roles
Illustrations
(1) The Agent [Devadatta Runs] I
(2) The Agent, The Object - ~qC;ft: ~ ~ I
semantic function
(affected) 3)
4)
l
The Agent,
.·L.
.
.
--~-
-- -
-~-
mt
~I
(Devadatta studies· Vedas]
The Agent,
~qC;ft: ~ ~ I
THE MEANING OF THE PASSIVE
.
- ~qC;ft:
The Object (Goal) .
. The Object.(Neutral) .
:> OF. THE PASSIVE
[Devadatta cooks rice]
[Devadatta worships Krishna]
45
5)
(6)
The Agent, The Object,
~~ ~ ~ ~ I
(affected) Instrment
[Devadatta cooks rice with fire]
The Particip'Int rol The Positioner
(2)
The Positioner,
The Agent, The Object, - ~q,rcl: 4'i1~'\114 ~ ~ I Recipient
[Devadatta gives rice to Yagnadatta]
(7) . The Agent, The Object, - ~q<:;'\1:
The Location
'JJ;!
The Location
~.~ ~
The Process:
[Devadatta cooks rice in the
The uncontrolled C
poVin his house] (8)
(1)
participate in a proces
The Agent, The Object, - ~qC;'\1: ~ I{)(TIIH il1"R
[Devadatta bought fruits from the forest)
The Position: .
differentiate the proces. category of the action t literature) it seems that from the action. It is n
-\
an Agent-less constru
The Position is a controlled static situation. It needs an animate controller.
participant gets the SE If the position predication has only one participant, then the positioner e.g.
takes place. The Positioner is that entity which controls the situation.
tluT ~
I
[A ·Ieaf. failS de
e.g fut;: ~ I.
~ d(t\
i
[The lion has slept]
I [The dust lifts The two place pre
[The hermits are awakened]
participant viz.force. T If the position. has a second participant, then it indicates location,
which is the cause of e function, 'Force'. II is diffl e.g. ~ qui-
[The lion has slept in the forest)
'f14'
crn1
[The leaf failS dOli
(jq)q~ ~ I
[The hermits are awakened in the hermitage) The position-p;ed,ication has following participant~r.oles: '.~
.: ..~ ..
~
. i , ..
[The cloud .IQbks t .
. The
.... :.
.~ .':. . .~. .~.~..:< . '. .
.
-',
,,'
.
',.
.
.
~
fOrCerr;~y~taf
..:'; ::.:".:' : -:,: "
. >THS·MI;ANINGOF::J.'\:I¥. .'
.,
'
,-.:'
"';~".- ;~.
.~
","
............
~~~~~~~~~~~--------------
The Participant roles (1)
)ks rice with fire]
Illustration
The Positioner (Devadatta stands]
S
(2)
rice to Yagnadatta]
Brf·~~ (s rice in the
The Positioner,
~ ~ 34Ri«:::, I
The Location
[Devadatta has sat in the chair]
The Process : The uncontrolled Dynamic situation is the process. The objects that participate in a process cannot control it. Sanskrit grammarians do not differentiate the process from the action. They consider the process in the
'ruits from the forest]
category of the action but from the speaker's intuitions (or rather from the literature) it seems that the Sanskrit speakers viewed the process different from the action. It is not controlled so it has no' Agents. It can be said
n animate controller.
an Agent-less construction. If it has one place predication, then, the participant gets the semantic function of affected.
then the positioner
e.g. -quf ~ I
rols the situation.
[A leaf falls down]
[The dust lifts up] The two place predication in the process situation, has the second ldicat\is location,
participant viz.force. The entity which does not control the situation but
}
L.
which is the cause of or which instigates the situation, gets the semantic function, 'Force' .It is different from the instrument. It is a natural phenomenon.
e. g. ~. 'l"f 1:f
lies.: .
[The cloud,.lQoks beautiful because of the lightfining] The force may. take place in one"place predication of the process . .>~: ;""~'" ~~~,.; ~:-' "~
. ':'. : '
. .:'
•.
'4;'7' . •• :. '.'
.--"-----._.. - .
_ ..
J, .
',0'.
." ..
., .'
) ..•. :.
r ,
e.g.
l=R''!
2. The Object (Affect
~ I
The force
[The wind blows]
3. The Object (Affec
The Direction
[The lightening lights]
4. The Object (Affec The third participant of the three-place predication may be asigned to The Location
the' semantic function of the Direction,. the location or the source;
5. The Object (Affec
The Direction :
The Source
The entity towards which something is moved has a semantic function
The State:
of the Direction. e.g. ~
"I'1TfR
The uncontrolled sta
~ ~ -
to' control the situation. !
[The leaves fall down to the earth because of the wind]
remain Neutral. Sometim or by a noun with an al
The Location :
The one-place pred has semantic function ' in the sky because of the .lightening]. . [The Cl9ud lookS beautiful ..' .
.
. . ifu!>t,
e.g. ~
' . '
The Location may take place in two-place predications, too.
I
[A flower is yelkiw]
~~I: ~':r (3Tfur) [The lightening looks beautiful in the sky]
[Ramesh (is) handi
The Source:
The Staie-predicati
The Participant rc 1. The Neutral (ob
fA leaf falls down from the tree because of the wind]. Thus, the process predication has following participant roles.
Participant roles
Illustration
I,
The Ambient: There aresor;ne si
1. The Object (Affected)
"."
which no specific.parti ," . .
[Grass growsJ. ..
as Ambient [(Chaffe)j . .. . . ~
.. 48
..."' '
TI"EM)::Af'lINGb.F.: THE PASSIVE
'"to"
..... THE
MEANING~F.THE'
1 I -~
~ . if!
h
~ation may be asigned to .
tion or the source;
;
2. The Object (Affected) [The trees tremble because of the wind]
The force 3. The Object (Affected)
- .;fR ~
I
[Water comes down to the earth]
The Direction
4. The Object (Affect.ed) [The grass grows on the earth]
The Location
5. The Object (Affected)
-
~~¥wmr I [Plant comes out from the seed]
The Source
has asemanticfunction
31IJI'iBUl
The State: The uncontrolled static situation is 'State'. The participants are not able to control the situation. At the same time they are not affected by it. They
of the wind]
remain Neutral. Sometimes, the State is denoted by a past-passive participle or by a noun with an auxilliary which is 110t mentioned in the sentence. The one-place predication of the 'State' situation has an object which has semantic function 'Neutral'
:e of the lightening].
e.g.
·edications, too.
[A flower is yell'Ow]
'l.ll~1: ~'r (3lfur) [Ramesh (is) handicapped]. .,
The Stale-predication has following participant roles .
'1e wind].
The Participant role
Illustration
1. The Neutral (object)
•
ariicipant roles.
, (
• ....
The Ambient:
«P: I
[The sun is red]. .
~-
There are some situations, generally natural processes or State with which no specific:participant roles are connected.This sijuation is known as Ambient: [(Chaffe)]. There is neither any 'Agent, nor ~ny 'under goer' .. . .. ~
~INGbF. THE PASSIVE.
....'..
..... THE MEANING; OF "rHE;:PASSIVE '.
49
r
------------
[Devadatta cooks rice]
[Rice is cooked]
I};
of the speaker. The perspe
l
event decides the dec rea!
i:':
Some Views on the mea,
4'1\c\'<1: ~ 'i->l4k1 I
The proposiiional mea
[Yagnadatta worships a God]
[A God is worshipped] has a
the Passive. One view emp
~.I (Rama kills RavaQa ), but it takes one
the Active and the Passiv
The valency of a verb is augmented in causals. The verb valency of 2 in
wr:
mot
the Passive constructions.
more participant in its causal form as <.fun-
<Jl'tur mot ~
~
I [Sita makes
meaning difference. In fac constructions is the sarr
Rama RavaQa kill]. The effect of augmentation increases the valency ofVRt by 1 and thus
particip'ants differs.
makes the intransitive verbs transitive. The transitive verbs are also
G. Stein quotes Pou',
augmented by the valency of 1 in causals. Examples are as' follows:
"From the ,above ob!
The Active
that an active sentence ar
The Causal 3P"e!T1l' 31'lT U 1<1<1 k1 I
[The horse runs]
[The horse-rider makes the horse run]
~I: om;f '[The child cries]
"Qcrrfu
I
qld4Rl I
[Ramesh reads a book]
[Mahesha makes 'Ramesha read a book]
4i!1Gct: ~ 'i->l4k1 I
~ClGfI: ~,~ 'i->l4Rl I
, [Yagnadatta worships god]
to the two participants il in which the object of It ('Studies in the func
, [Suresh'makes the child cry]
_ "g~1: ~~t ~
there being distinct differ>
[Devadatta makes Yagnadatta worship god]
In the following two (1) John eats swe' (2)
Sweets are
the process is of 'e of the process, 'sweets sentences is the sam
, The verb valency is based on the perception of situation by the speakers.
circumstances. The op
Augmenting valency of verb is also perception based as an extra Agent
" ................ but altl
(Causer) is perceived by the speaker. But when the speaker reduces the
voice transformation its
valency he is not perceiving reduction of agent because reduction is in
and 'Mary was kissed I
the mind of the speaker and not in the actual situation. What makes the
of the actIOn.
speaker to reduce the valency of a verb? The answer lies in the,· understanding of an expression of a situation perceived 'by the, speaker. o
•
'." .
52
.
. Ii
('Studies in the fu
. . " . . .
The decreasing,iJ.nd the augmenting of valency is bas'ed,on the motivation .•.~,.' .
.
Jesp~rsenstresSE
~I cooked]
of the speaker. The perspective under which the speaker represents the event decides the decrease of the augmenting of the valency.
f
Some Views on the meaning of Passive :
I
; worshipped]
The proposiiional meaning remains the same in the Active as well as the Passive constructions. There are two views regarding the meaning of
,als. The verb ~, has a vaQa ), but it takes one
rcrut ~
I [Sita makes
the Passive. One view emphasizes that there is meaning difference between the Active and the Passive constructions and the other view denies the meaning difference. In fact, the propositional meaning underlying the two constructions is the same. But the prominance given to the different
ncy ofVRt by 1 and thus lnsitive verbs are also nples are as' follows :
participants differs. G. Stein quotes Poutsma in the following words : "From the above observations it follows that it is a mistaken' notion
n:rfu
I
makes the. horse run]
. I he child cry] qld~Rl I
Ramesha read a boOk1,
,!Zi1 ;qRl I ; Yagnadatta
that an active sentence and its passive conversion are identical in meaning, there being distinct difference in the prominence assigned by the speaker to the two participants in the action, and in the degree .of Passiveness in which the object of the activity is represented" . ('St!Jdies in .the function of Passive' - G. Stein (1979.P.34)) In the following two sentences; (1) John eats sweets; and (2)
Sweets are eaten by John.
the process is of 'eating'. It is performed by 'John' and as a result of the process, 'sweets' is affected. So the meaning underlying the two sentences is the same but it is expressed differently under certain
Jation by the speakers. ;ed as an extra Age~t !speakerreducesthe cause reduction is in tion: What makes the ) answer 'Iies in the ,ived by the. speaker. sedan the motivation ING OF. THE PASSIVE'
circumstances. The opinion of Quirketal differs from Poutsma. He says " ................ but although the structure of a sentence c'anges under voice transformation its meaning remains the same. In 'John kissed Mary' and 'Mary was kissed by John"'John' is in both the voices the 'performer' of the action." ('Studies in the function of Passive' -G Stein (1979 P'35)) . Jespersen stresses both the aspects
.' niE MEANIN~OF THE
PASSIVE
-
:- .
53
-
'--,-
.
..
having + animacy and + the objects having- anim
'Tom beats John' (active) and'John was beaten byTom' mean essentially the same thing and yet. they are not in every respect synonymous, and it is therefore not superfluous for a language to have both turns and thus
the world has a word-ol
be able to shift the point of view. As a rule the person or thing that is
.
.
The Vividness :
the centre of interest at the rnoment is made the subject of the sentence, and therefore the verb is in some cases put in the active,in others in the pas~ive:'
The words whose processed more quickl~
(Studies in the function of Passive-G. Stein. (1979 P.34/35»
These views of the scholars are based on two d"itferent approaches.
The motivation of the
According to the truth value there is no meaning difference but according
The Motivation 6f th
to the perspective or the circumstances under which they are selected they
of the sentence. That ob
have different meanings. They are context-bound and no two different utterances mean the same in the same context. According to G.Stein.
comes earlier and bec(
.''The meaning relation we sense between the active and the passive
the3rd principle i.e. Th
the Active and the Pa:
voice is based on extra.-linguistic knowledge of how actions are performed, of how events can ha.ppen, of how situations arise. In language reality the
speaker.) The Sentence Produl
active as well as the passive formulation of one and the same extra linguistic
The Sentence pre
situation occur very rarely in the same speech act." (Studies in the function
. producing an utteranci
of Passive-G. Stein (1779-P'36»
thought that he wishe
From the above mentioned views of the Scholars, it can be concluded that the Active and the Passive constructions are two.different.realiZations
is then organized.into s of propositional meani
of the sarne propositional meaning under different perspectives.
The situation is requir
The comparability olthe propositiona.l meaning olthe Active and the Passive
perspective is selectE
Voice is based on the perception of the speaker. The speaker represents the event which he has perceived through the worldly objects. His knowledge of
processes like active This choice of persp
worldly objects helps him in the production of the sentence. His knowledge remains the same whether he produces active or passive utterances. According
When a situation the speaker will rnake
to C.E.Osgood, the speaker produces the sentence through three principles-
conception of the act (1) The Naturalness (2) The Vividness and (3) The .motivation of the,.
object, a place and til . spe~k of all the pari
speaker
anda given context r
The Naturalness':
sh~1I overlooksorne
It is but natural for a huin.an. being to perceive an'imaJe:'objeclsa'rid . ... ". ',.'
'
the objects havingfiioverilents. So while producing the sent~n¢e;th:e'cibjects
. '~":<~
"."
. " ".:",
. . n'·
54
THE
.~
'
.. .
..• " .:\. :: .;:
• .theciii~CQ~isElte~t. ar .. ." .. '
.. ";".- ..",,.' '. . '
..
", ...
ME";".rijN~.:()f';):~. ....- . . , PASSI'JE ..•.. ," .. ",
,
-
-- .,>. ' - ' . } ! ) ~,:g/
",
.
..
"
", .>' .:'.; ":'"': .," ~. --.
---------~----
'Tom' mean essentially ect synonymous, and
..
-.--~
... ---.
-------_._--
.-
------~.----~--
having + animacy and + movement are natural to be uttered earlier then the objects having-animacy and-movement. That is why no language of
e both turns and thus arson or thing that is bject of the sentence,-
the world has a wOrd·order which has object prior to subject. The Vividness :
lctive, in others in the
The words whose meaning have dominant affective features are
in. (1979 P'34/35))
processed more quickly so they are expressed earlier in the sentence.
different approaches. erence but according
The motivation of the Speaker: The Motivation of the speaker plays an important role in the production
:hey are selected they and no two different \ccording to G.Stein.
of the sentence. That object to whom the speaker wants to give prominence comes earlier and becomes a subject. (for the purpose of understanding the Active and the Passive, we will take into consideration the 1st and
:tive and the passive ctions are performed, 1 language reality the
the3rd principle i.e. The principle of naturalness and the motivation of th,~
~
The Sentence Production :
speaker.)
same extra linguistic
.tudies in the function
The Sentence production is an encoding process. The process of producing an utterance begins with th.e speaker formulating some idea or thought that he wishes to communicate:the idea which is unorganized
:, it can be concluded different realizations Jerspectives.
is then organized into some sentence construction:The idea has one aspect of propositional meaning in which some situation of an object is conveyed. The situation is required to be projected with particular perspective. This
Active and the Passive
perspective is selected and automatically chains of reactions (Sentence
Jeaker represents the cts. His knowledge of
processes like active/passive, agreement, case suffix etc.) take place. This choice of perspective is a choice of subject.
:ence. His knowledge utterances. According
When a situation, for example an action
n
(to Kill) is to be coded
the speaker will make selection of the participant roles. His perception and
Jugh three principles-
conception of the action
·he motivation of the,.
~
(to kill) will have an agent, an instrument, an
object, a place and time of the action. But tl:1e speaker will not necessarily . speak of all the participant roles in his utterance. In a given discourse .anda given coritext lie will give prominence to some participant roles and
3.ni~ate;objf~Cts·.a,rtd·. se'ntence,the.objects
.-
,"'
..
'
",
:
".'
'.
stikll overlook. some ofthem. While producing an utterance, the context, .
.,
"...:
-,'
'
"
:\
.
the discQurse' text. and the motivation. of the speaker'play a major role in ~, ..... ,':~ . ~( .... .. :..... ..••.
"
-.:.
'r,', :"., "
• ' •. ~.
_~;_f
.
55
Agent Focussed -
overall surface shape of sentences. If propositional meaning of given sentences is same then one has to look for other features- that are the
In other words we
motivation of the speaker, the text and the context of discourse. (1)
~ '1\ll(~~
"{j+f:"
perspective of the Agi
uquf. ~ I
by the Active sentence and the verb.
[In the noon, Rama Killed RavaQa in the battle-field) (2)
"{j+f:"
~ ~ ~ I
According to the t
.
basic. It has an animl
[Rama'killed RavaQa with an arrow) (3)
"{j+f:"
In other words, it mainl
uquf ~, I
This Agent has an agn
[Rama killed RavaQa) (4)
subject is denoted b~
ucrrr: Wlw ~ I
. The selection of .
[RavaQa was killed by Rama) (5)
ucrrr:
m til:
The Naturalness Pri
. o·
I
(6)
~
e.g. ~
~ I
wruIT
onuR :U
ucrrr:
~
'1'<
I
[Yagnadatta eats
[RavaQa was killed by Rama 's arrow] (8)
31lcR
[Devdatta cooks
[RavaQa was killed with an arrow]
(7) . WR'
r
If the action is
[RavaQa was killed by Rama)
The action of coo so the Agents are s' participant which is
I
[RavaQa was killed] The propositional meaning of all these sentences is the same.
Affected ~
~
[A Leaf falls dOl
(Action transitive) - Agent, Object, Instrument, Location, Time.
It is easy to understand the dropping of location and Time. They are peripheral roles of the predication. Even if the instrument is dropped the
l "
1:!"f
i.e. when the proc the subject.-
sentence structure is not changed. But when the Agent is dropped or not
e.g. ftrg: ~
focussed upon the sentence has different shape than that when the Agent
[the Lion .has s~
is not dropped and focussed upon. "{j+f:"
uquf
iRr
'!
If the State is ~
I (~)
aCjC;-d:
(Rama kills {killed) RavaQa)
.. 56
'
,..
~
[De~adattais b
THE~EANiN$(>f,T( . .. '
'."
(- - - - - ---
,,
-~---
~--
---
al meaning of given
Agent Focussed -
eatures- that are the
In other words we can say that the proposition is expressed with a
t of discourse.
perspective of the Agent. On surface level this perspective is signalled by the Active sentence type and the Agreement is between the Agent noun and the verb.
Jattie-field]
According to the Naturalness Principle of C.E. Osgood, the Active is basic. It has an animate controller (Agent) which controlls the situation. In other words, it mainpulates other objects in the fulfillment of the situation. This Agent has an agreement with the verb and is made subject. In Sanskrit subject is denoted by the grammatical agreement with the verb . . The selection of the subject depends upon the following rules. f,
The Naturalness Principle If the action is predicated, then the Agent becomes the subject, e.g. ~q<;'\1: ~.~ I [Devdatta cooks rice] 'H1<;'\1:
~~t ~
I
[Yagnadatta eats 'chapati] The action' of cooking and eating are predicated which needs controller, so the Agents are subjects here. If the process is predicated then, the participant which is affected become subject. ;es is:the same.
Affected - ~
ent, Location, Time.
[A Leaf falls down]
1
I
i.e. when the process is predicated the patient orthe under goer becomes the subject.-
and Time. They are
Jment is dropped the
e.g. fu-g: q-;l ~
ent is dropped or not 1 that when
'1
the Agent
[the Lion has slept in the forest]. If the State is predicated Neutral becomes the Subject. ~ CjC("i1:. ~l:lTl1: I'
[Devadatta is black] ..
.
IIN(>,QF"HIE PASSIVE
'THE MEA/IIil'l~. ofTHg;PASSIIiE
.::.'~.
... ...• . . . . . . . . . . • '>'("
57
, i
The Motivation of the Speaker :
There are some otl
[
looked upon as the Ag
How the speaker cognisesthe event and how he represents it in a
as an Agent (by the \\
sentence is important in the process of selection of the subject. If the
Ul'f:' ~-;:r
. Action is predicated, according to the naturalness Principle, the Agent is
[Rama kills with a
selected as the subject. If the speaker does not want to emphasise Agent's
. orrot: t:fu I
Agentivity for some specific r.eason, he demotes the Agent and represents .
it as an instrument in the performance of an action. In such cases, speaker
[The arrow kills]
selects object as the subject of the sentence.
~tlGu: ~
Let's see the way Sanskrit grammarians look at it. They describe two aspects of Action <1lT1:fK and qz;r (Process or the change of state and its result). The participants join tile action during the accomplishment of the action. Some join during ~ (Process) stage and 5{)me join during '«'f (Result)· stage. The Agent and the Instrument join during the <1:IT'ffi' stage and the Object and the Recipient join during the Result stage. The
I
~
\I
[The pot cooks]
" i ii
redundant, and we ha is not passivised. Bec1 Instrument once prom( ~ C( c;i1:
/ Process
(~)
~~~
&
[The pot cooks rit
(~)~4
\ Result (~)
[Rice is cooked \
\
/
,
Object (q;l=j')
Agent (q;m)
Location (31f\:!'!'i{UI)
The location is 10 roots)
/~\
Instrument (~)
m:~~m
Recipent (ld+>lcW\)
[Lord stays in Va
m:
Source (314\c;H)
. -:
~) the~ the Agent bec~mes the subject andlHhe result part is in focus, theobje2t~ecom~s the subject. .. If
t~e
..
,\
",
.
".
-': ... <
~'~~T .
' . '
proce.;,s part js in focus ( .--~.
:itc;:;:f ~
[Devadatta cooks
in the following diagram.
I
<::Rffu I
If the instrument is I
of the Action. TheY are two .end points. That's why they se.em to be related with both the aspects, yetthey are peripheral. The relations can be illustrated Action (
'C['i
'. [Devadatta cooks I
Location and the source are not directly involved in ~ or'«'f aspect
...
t:fu .1
. ,',"
. .. ~
.[L~rdstays at) V
";heR~ciPient i~ "',
. .",
.
----------~-----"------.-----
..- - - .
---
There are some other processes by which the lower participants are he represents it in a )f the subject. If the
looked upon as the Agent or the Object. The Instrument is looked upon as an Agent (by the way of ( ~{Ulf u+1:
o emphasise Agent's
[Rama kills with an arrow]
such cases, speaker
as in
onUt
rinciple, the Agent is
\gent and represents
)
. mur: t\"Rr
I
[The arrow kills]
~qc;-'<1: ~ ~ it. They describe two
.[Devadatta cooks with a pot]
change of state and
~~I
.. ~ accomplishment of ~nd
some join during
oin during the c;qr:rnhe Result stage. The . c;qr:rn- or tpQf aspect
iy seem to be related ions can be illustrated
[The pot cooks] ·If the instrument is looked upon as an Agent, the original Agent becomes redundant, and we have the new Agent as the subject. But the sentence is not passivised. Because inthe passive an Agent becomes oblique. The Instrument once promoted as an Agent, if passivized, becomes redundant. ~qC;"\1: ~ ~ q-;;rfu I
[Devadatta cooks rice with a pot] ~~.~I
[The pot cooks rice-Devadatta redundant]
(~)~~·I '1") [Rice is cooked with /by a pot] The location is looked upon as an object (by way of change in verbroots)
:ipen!
(H +>;j c; 1'1)
[Lord stays in Vaikun\ha]
···mt~··~~~.1 . the Agent becomes ~ecomes the subject.
• ··.[Lordstays ~t) VaikuQthal 'T>TheReciPieni
..
.
i~ "iookedLipon as an object. In gq'qI1~; the person to
~1~~ti~";''''.'il~t".:,.~S~P,!frft...~_ "
.
.i' . .. . . . .. ,.
"
..
whom something is said is used as an object instead of Recipient. e.g. ~ Slc;l 'HF1~ <:11 f
Group-A
(1)
(Saraswati told Savitri)
~~ [In the alternl
(Instead of <:1{f<1~ ~ it is used as <:1H
(2)
The oblique object Instrument can be promoted as an Agent, and the
wr: mvt
0[1'
[Rama killed
indirect obi.ect location and the oblique object Recipient can. be promoted
(3)
as the dir(3ct object.
wr: wrrt
31:
[Rama killed
Thus, basically Sanskrit has two types- the Active and the passive.
Group-B
By naturalness principle, the Agent is selected as the subject and by
(1)
demoting the Agent we have the passive type. The Agent and the object
[Ravaoa wa;
are nuclear participant roles connected with two aspects of action "ilfI11R" and q;c;r/. The other non-nuclear roles can not be selected as subject unless they. are looked upon as an Agent· or an object. (by Way" of
Group-C
B~fUiT)
propositional meaning is also selected. If the participant the 'Agent' is
I
selected as a subject then the Agent takes nominative and agrees with
i
The Impact of subject selection on the surface structure of a sentence. Once the subject is selected the perspective of expressing the
.. the verb,. and the active type.. of. sentence is constructed.
~ WfUI:
i
(1)
~ WfUI: [Ravaoa wa!
(2)
-.rruR
WfUI:
[Raval)a wa:
(3)
u+Wl"
~
[Ravaoa wa
e.g. 4W";tI: ~ ~ I
(4)
(Yagnadatta worships Krisoa)
o
If the object is selected as the subject, the object (~) becomes the subject and takes nominative and the verb becomes passive. The Agent is demoted and looked upon as an instrument in the performance of an action. e.g ~ 4'i1G-ct'1 ~ I (Krishoa is being worshipped by Yagnadatta) One of the two participant roles the Agent and the object may be selected as the Subject. These two (the Agent and the object) are the nuclear Participant roles. The way of conveying the situation depends upon the selection of one of them. How the speaker cognises the situation and how· he represents. it selects the focus of the sentence and thereby selects the type of the co~struction. The following 3 groups show and the group :'C' have an object as its subject: .
60
th;;tiJh~.Group
'B'.
uqur: ~ I
[Ravaoa wa These three grou constructions, Group has passive particip constructed alter dec Band C has the same the verbal and the meaning.(The differ Participial) is alread:' The procedure ( . followingdiagram ...
f ,ad of Recipient. e.g.
[In the afternoon Rama killed RavaQa in the battlefield]
(2)
as an Agent, and the lient can. be promoted
WIT wrrf ~
[Rama killed RavaQa with an arrow] (3)
WIT uqut
s the subject and by
Group-B
Agent and the object ;pects of action t.!fft!R"
(1)
cted as subject unless by way of ('f~{UIT)
Group-C
I
~"WfUI: ~ I [RavaQa was killed by Rama]
(1)
ucture of a sentence.
ative and ag reeswith trueted.
3Wl
[Rama killed RavaQa]
:tive and the passive.
'e of expressing the tieipant the 'Agent' is
3Wl
~. ~ -gO: I
[RavaQa was killed by Rama]
(2)
~"WfUI: -gO: I
[RavaQa was killed with an arrow]
. (3)
~ ~ "U'f'lT:
-gO:
I
[RavaQa was killed with Rama 's arrow]
(4) !et ('J'll'T) becomes the passive. The Agent is 1orma:nee of an action.
object may be selected lject) are the nuclear on depends upon the ; the situation and how nd thereby selects the lOW
that th~ Group 'B'
"U'f'lT: ~ I
[RavaQa was killed] These three groups have different surtace shapes. Group Ahas Active constructions, Group 'B'. has passive (verbal) construction and Group 'C' has passive participial constructions. The sentences of Group 'A' are constructed after deciding the undergoer as a subject. Though the group Band C has the same subject. i.e. object, they differ on the surface structurethe verbal and the participial constructions. They do not differ in the meaning.(The difference between these two constructions (Verbal & Participial) is already discussed in Chapter 111.) . The procedure. of two 'differentconstructions can be seen from the following diagram ...
61
..
'
5·>
.. ,
CHAPTE] THE SANS] R6
Q)
Ie ::>
r--
c Q)
>--
'"
~~
Z
C:
i
(ij
'0. '5
'0. '-'0
a:
~
.,.
Q)
~
.t-- U ::>
~
two alternative constl
Ii
will be based mainly 01
!
C
types. The comparisl
1aU
simplicity between t~
0
f--
0
z
i
.3
E 2
r--
'-- U; E
r--
~
c:
(ij
a..
~
complexity particular well 'as the verbal fc
~
22:§ C
'"a..z
form the structure ca is simple in nature. :
i
.c
>
If a semantic or·,
i
"E Q)
1i.iC C Q) -"":"E
Sanskrit has two n
'" :11-
-'"
The passive is uni study of the overall VE passive construction.
i
0
(f)
0.
13 Ql t-- :0 0
0.
'"Z
a..
Ql
>
~
'w
-:::::I"@ c~_ Q)-c
-
0).
'" '--
a..
z
•
-
ti .- Q) Q) E > ....... 0 ~
(ij
Oz,.~.
'0. r - '5
'" ~
.~
The verabal type . Sanskrit Grammaric
~
represents an obstn
a..
~
~
u.; 1ii
c
.E.EE
Ol
~- -
-
U
«
'"a..z
(3
-
:l
L-(ij
~
Ql
.~g ~
c3«m
«
c::z
E .-
~
i
(TIM) + Person-Nunr
.,
.~
0
:g
(VRT) + Formative a
Q)'
.c
«
can be further divide
:l:l-
'"a..z c
be discussed first.
i
>.
"E Ql
and the patricipial, e.~ gatawan/. They functil
[
Q)
«.E~
'" a..
-
UJ
Q)
1!1§£
s:
~
«z~
I til C
o ~ o
e
c.
CL
""U
g>
'2 '"
~
:' .. ',:,:
C
o
ti
". Jl
.~
.0
(f):::J
0)'.:
VRt
-.
...... " c
o
....2·..
::.'.
CU'
.. :' ,.
o .':~ . "" · '.:g. :5"" · .'0;' . -(I>
oW'.
..... :.:
-:S- ,.,;"::
. f:' .. '
> .'
CHAPTER·3 THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE SANSKRIT VERBS & PARTICIPLES If!, The passive is universally looked upon as a form of the Verb. A detailed study of the overall verb-phrase is necessary before embarking upon the passive construction. The focus will be on the comparison .between the .
t
(ij
'i'i
r-':g
i
two alternative constructions-the Active & the Passive. This comparison will be based mainly on the constitutents and the structure of these sentence
£ ~
types. The comparison is aimed at bringing about complexity vis-a-vis simplicity between these two types.
'[ (ij
.a
~~
~
If a semantic or a pragmatic function is realised in regular linguistic
t
form the structure can be said to be simple. In fact, no linguistic structure issimple in nature. Sanskrit lang~age shows a great deal of structural complexity particularly in its Inflectional system; in both the nominal as
i
~
:lg - " E !oc: c:
well as the verbal forms. Sanskrit has two major types of constructions in the verb-ph rase-the verbal
:2 g
, - c: ,:.E '" E" :
0-
and the patricipial, e.g./agachhatiin/ramab agachhatiand/gatawan linlramab
[
Q)
•· 0 E.~ : z, ~
(ij
'i'i r-:~
to:
'"
0.
gatawan/. They function as the head of the verb-phrase. The verbal type will
. be discussed first. .
t
The verabal type of the construction has two constitutents-Base + Suffix. Sanskrit Grammarians call them dhatu and lakar respectively.(Lakar represents an obstruct morpheme which has various realisations.) They
.~
~
can be further divided into five constitutents.The base into the Verb-Root
:l ....
i
·;
c: Q)
~
1i)
; .E E
,,-~
,,' : :::l Q)
' o.~
....
~
• 0-
:« m : .-
;
Q)
(VRT) + Formative and the Suffix into the Voicesign (VOG) + TenselMood
(
(TIM) + Person-Number~(P.N)
t
Verb
I
.~
E.~
~ ~ 1ti · c:
~ I
.C
g. .
. .'
i - ... ;.
.
VRt .
I Form
-
lal ' ..'.
PASSIVE
I
"THErvI.ORPHOL.q~r ~~::;.;,
/; ','··.':;~\;!ih:;;:~:<~·(· :. " '. ____ .. :'~~:;~.
Voc 1
lvYadi
'". "1? ) .
~INa :OFTHE
I
·<1·.·.•. " .. '...
0
Q)
.. S·
~ )
.
Suffix
Base
101
PN
TIM
I
1 . •!
Iti!
101
/wadatir ..•..
'
..:
The Active Verbform : .
MoreoverVerb-Roc • Group A: Iparas
The Active verb-form has five constitutents (VRT + Form) + VOC +
(whict
TIM + PN. These constituents are described in detail.
The Verb-Root:
Group B:
The Verb-Roots are divided into ten groups. They are grouped acco~ding to the formative suffix (c6njug.alional suffix) they take. These groups are
Group C : IUbhay<
latma
lataml
called conjugations (or GaQa as the Sanskrit Grammarians call them). They
The Iparasmaipadf
are as follows :
is treated as the middl.
Group-A:
this distinction was se
Sanskrit Name
assumed that the fruit,
Example
in the case of the pare
1. bhwadi GaQa
bhO, wad, path, has, gam
accrues to the person
2. diwadi GaQa
diw, n(t, nas, bhram, sram
e.g.~~[D'
3. . tudadi GaQa
tud, i$, likh, sp(sa, k$ip
4. churadi GaQa
chur, kath, bhak$, chi nt,
'!ilPc;d: 4"1'11'114
This distinction tt
by the speakers. It i parasniaipada only ar .
Group-B:
5.. adadi GaQa
used in Ubhayapada (
as, i, rud, duh, lih.
distinction. explained a . hu, bhT, bh(, ma, da,
but it is not so. This
7. sWadiGaoa
ap, sak, as, chi, su
not a semantic one.
8. rudhadi GaQa
rudh, chhid, bhid, hins, bhuj
9. tanadi GaQa
tan, k(
10 kryadi GaQa
krT, gandh, manth, g(h, jna
6. juhotyadi GaQa
o
I
The VRTs are dill Some roots tak
I gami$yati I. They fo I apsyati I. This is anc which take I i I optio
The group-A is having its bases ending in/-a/while the basis of the Group B do not end in I-a/. These two· groups are based on the grammatical
Sometimes, the r
condition because they take different PN suffixes (in some 2nd Pr: Dual
Igaml ,gachha I I d(:
and plural and 3rd pro Dual.).
.....
.":
the passive c.onditions
"
the Rociti\self is chan
I - I mru/lnTI-)i 64
THE MORPHOLQ(iY. Of . :.,
•
:
:.
:,~
, .:" .
.,- ,
··:!L~)···
.
".-"
.
;-~-..I
MoreoverVerb-Roots can be further divided fnto three types of groups .
•
IIRT + Form) + VOC +
Iparasmaipadalgenerates ac~rtain series of PN allomorphs
Group A:
(which will be explained in due course).
jetail.
latmane padal generates another set of PN allomorphs.
Group B:
Group C : IUbhayapadaigenerates the sets of Iparasmaipada/or
( are grouped acco~ding :ake. These
grou~s
are
latamnepadaloptionally:
narians call them). They
The Iparasmaipadalis treated as the Active voice and the latmanepadal is treated as the middle voice by some western scholars. It appears that this distinction was semantic in nature. In the case of atmanepada ,it is assumed that the fruit of the action accrues to the performer himself while in the case of the parasmaipada it is assumed that the fruit of the action
has, gam
accrues to the person other than the performer. ' e.g. ~
Iram; sram
q{lf$<1:
sa, ksip
q
[Devadatta performs a sacrifice for his own sake] and
I [The priest performs a sacrifice for the host].
This distinction though a semantic one, was no longer put to use
:s, chint,
by the speakers. It is difficult to understand why some roots have parasmaip'ada only and some have atmanepada only. Very few roots are used in Ubhayapada(Le. both the voices). If the roots follow the semantic
lih.
distinction explained above, then all the roots should have both the padas, I,
da,
but it is not so. This distinctions has remained only a lexical one and not a semantic one.
, su j,
The VRTs are divided into other 3 groups.
hins, bhuj
Some roots take iii before taking any particular suffix e.g.
I gamisyati I. They form one group. Some roots do not take I i I, 'e.g. th, mh, jna Iwhile the basis of the
I apsyati I. This is another group and the third group has the verb-Roots which take I i I optionally.
sed on the grarTune.tical
Sometimes, the root itself has more than one allomorph, such as
(in some 2nd Pr: Dual
Iganil cgachha I I drs / - I pasya I where I g'am I & / drs I are used in the passive c,onditions while I gachha I & I Pasya I in the Active. Sometimes the Root itself is changed on account of morpho-phonemic rules e.g. im(
I - I mru/ I nTt - 'nay I. IE MORP'HOLOGY OF .... :
>~.
THE MORPHOLQ!W' OF,',,':.. . .. ;,-.-
."
~ -~---~---
' 65
r iI
The Formative: The formative is used with a VRT to form a BASE of the verb. In the active verb forms, the conjugation signs of the VRT are taken as formative.
The Voice-Sign :,
They are as follows : it
1.
I - a I - (/wadl + I a I) in I wadati I
I,i
The active constr construction. Generally, verb form does not ha
II
Theallomorphs of Tel
i
(lPath I + I a' I) in I Pathati I
2.
I - ya I - (nrt I + I I ya I) in I nrtyati I (/diwl + I ya I) inl dTwyatil
3.
/ a /-
(/tud I + I a I) in I tudati! ,i
(/Iikhl + I a I) in I likhati I
4.
I aya I - ( I kath I + I I aya I) in I kathayati / (lbhak$ I + I aya I ) in I bhak$ayatil
Group - B '
'5.
! 0 I (/ as I + I 0 I) in lasti I
(I ichh I + I 0 I ) in { ichhati'l 6..
requplication of the first syllable (/ da I ,: I da /) in I dadati I
inu
i or I
Transition from the v by the reduction of the moods. They were cond, moulding of vedic into reduction trend (as San! and more lormal langw, and the simple future ar of the remaining two Pi they g'raduallylost thei reduction trend. The su the subjunctive) were c( potential became domir . arid the Imperative. ' All the tenses and
( I bhT I + I bhT I ) in I bibheti I 7.
These conjugation ~ the Imperfect past, the in other tenses and m(
1.
no I ( ! ap I + I nu I ) in I apnuhi I
e.g. (VRT + I
(I wad I + I .
( Isak I + I no I ) in I saknoti!
8.
Tile present t
I wada I + I
I -n- I ( I bhid I + I n I ) - I bhinat I in I bhinatti / . (I bhuj I + I n I ) - I bhunaj I in . I bhunakti I
9.
2.
I u I or I 0 I - ( I kru I + I u I ) in I kurute I
The fi rst lutu e.g. (I ap I -
( I tan I + I
0
I ) in I tanoti I '
10. Ina I or I np ( I kri I + I oa I ) in I k(fO~tT I ,,',' ' .. .. ,
..r . ,
( I krT I + I 01 I ) in' krT01$'wa I ..
:-
'
:,:"
-': .. ".
'.•
"
.",
THEM01'jP,~OLOd;OF .
::..
~
,
"".
":,
..
'.'
."
r--'--
'~----~~---~
-------~----------
!
These conjugation signs are linked with the VRT only in the present, the Imperfect past, the Imperative and the potential. They do not occur in other tenses and moods.
:;E of the verb. In the 'e taken as formative.
The Voice-Sign : The active construction is universally accepted as the basic construction. Generally, the basic forms are left un-marked. So the' active verb form does not have any voice sign.
The aliomorphs of Tense/Mood ':
yati /
Transition from the vedicto the classical Sanskrit is distinctively marked by the reduction of the functional distinction in the six tenses and four moods, They were condensed in three tenses and two moods. The gradual moulding of vedic into the classical sanskrit necessitated the structural ' reduction trend (as Sanskrit was becoming less and less spoken and more and more formal language). The imperfect past amongst the past tenses and the simple future amongst the future tenses became stronger. The use of the remaining two past tenses and one future tense was reduced and they gradually lost their position. The moods were also affected by this reduction trend. The subjunctive and the Injunctive (slightly different from the subjunctive) were completely lost. The conditional was rarely used. The potential became dominant. There remained only two moods- the potential 'and the Imperative.
;
lyati/
/ da /) in / dadati /
All the tenses and the moods had their own ailomofphs.
bhT / ) in / bibheti /
1.
The present tense has / I/J / aliornorph
luhi /
e.g. (VRT + form) + VOG + T / M + PN
knotil
(I wad / + / a / ) + / I/J / + / I/J / + / ti /
bhinatti /
/ wada / + / I/J / + / I/J / + / ti / wadati /
/ bhunakti /
2.
lte /
e.g. (/ ap / + / I/J / ) + / ta / + / I/J /
Jti /, ~tT
I
$wa I
....
.
3.,
'
. . '.
;
..
"
.
.
.
'The second f.uture has / sya / allomorph. /) + / I/J I + I sya I +- I ti I
' . '
,
"
'
..
..
/ ,apta /
e.g,>ljap)+ I I/J
.
-' .. ....
.....
. ,
-
The first future has / ta / aliomorph.
..,
' '
...
.'
, :':·:.,'j;apsyati I
-~~-~~~~~----------~--~--~
,
T'iE 'Mol'IPHOL()G¥ ,QF .... ' 6 7 .' "
"
-
,
, 4. . The Imperfect past has I a- I allomorph. e.g
The Person Number:
I a I ( Ikath I + I aya I ) + I 0 I + I t /
I akathayat I 5:
The Aorist has I a- I in prefix position, but sometimes it"also takes
I i I and / s I or I
~
I
(It has seven types which take different PN suffixes). e.g.
L i
There are three m singular is used for a si
, !:
I al (/ gam 1+ I 0 I ) +·1 at I
.1
than two. Amongst ther it was lost in the midd
I agamat I I al (/ gam I +1 01) + 0 +/ as I
Though ihe persor categories, they are re, conditions the other ar
!-agarnas I
6.
The perfect past does not h~ve / a 1 but instead it has the reduplication of the first syllable of the Root as its allomorphic realisation. This reduplication follows. morphophonemic rules.
There are three pel first person indicated in ownself. The Second ·F used for a person or 2
,.,
e.g. llikhamil Ilikhl + Form + V(
e.g. 1 gam I + . ( I gam !-+ I 0 I ) + 1 0 1 + 1.0 I.
llikhl + fal + 101 -
1 jagama 1
The PN suffJxes
0
7.' Amongst. the moods, the imperative has 101 allomorph.
e.g..
'(/wad/+/a/) + /01.
+ .101 + I
tu I . 1st pro
I wadatu 1 . .
8.
.
2nd pro
The potential has I-T/ and I-yal allmorphs e.g.
(/kathl+laya/) + I 0 ./ + / i I + I t 1
3rd pro
I kathyet I In addition to thei conditioned by-
and (/krl + 101) + 101 + Iyal + It!
. I kuryat I 9,
IPadai condil
(1)
The conditional uses I a-I of past and I-sya-I of Future
lal + (/kru/+/0/) + 101 syal + Itl (2)· Tense/Mood
I akari$yat I As. there remained only 3 tenses and 2 Moods in .classical Sanskrit, there remained only 4 allomorphs of TIM as 'follows: .. 1)
The present & the imperative - 101
(2) Th~
3)
The futurEi. I - syal
(4) The Poientia.1
'-
past: /a- /
....
i-
1/ .
'
•• ' '",£.
68
..
THE .r,I·qRPHOLOGY OF .... .
. , '."
THE MORPHOLOiiy,.QF
. ·:·L>·
. .___~
---.------c-~---------------
..
The Person Number Suffix: -
i
There are three persons and three numbers in classical Sa[1skrit.The first person indicated in an utterance shows that it is used for the speaker's ownself. The Second Person is used for the listener. The third person is used for a person or a thing other then the speaker and the listener.
ll
~,
om"'im" il·al" lak" .
-~.----
~;
t
+I t I
I
...- -.. -.... --... -.. - ..--.. --.- .........
,
There are three numbers-the singular, the Dual and the Plural. The
PN suffixes).
singular is used for a single object, the dual for two and the plural for more than two. Amongst them the dual was structurally very weak. That is why it was lost in the middle Indo-Aryan languages.
sI
Though the person a:nd the Number are the two separate semantic categories, they are realized through one suffix in Sanskrit. Each category conditions the other and 9 allomorphic variations are emerged.
'ut instead it has the oot as its aliomorphic
e.g. llikhamil
phophonemic rules.
llikhl + Form +
0/+1.0/.
Ilikhl + /al + 101 + 101 + Imil (1 st Pro singular).
vac +
Present + PN
The PN suff.ixes of Present tense (parasmaipada) are as follows:
101 allomorph.
Sing.
Dmil
' Plural
.1 st pro
lmi I
I was I
I mas I
. 2nd pro
I si I
I thas I
I tha I
3rd pc
I ti I
..
L
tI
Itas
f
I anti I
In addition to their own conditions PN suffix allomorphs are further conditioned by -
(1)
;ya-I of Future
(2)
IPadal condition -
Tense/Mood condition -
in classical Sanskrit,
's : Ie past: I a- I
(a)
I pa,rasmai pada I
(b)
I atmanepada I
(1)
Present-Future
(2)
Past
(3)
Imperativ!3
(4)
Potential;... "
~
Potential /- T I .~:
".
J',1QRPHOLOGY OF ....
.' T,HE MORPHOLOGY'9F ....
. . .
·,::.L~ __ .· ~_' __'__ '"
..
-: ~.
..
:;.f.
69
..
, i' \
Thus to generate a PN suffix one has to take into account the Verb-
The active verb
Root (whether it is IParasmaipadTI or I atmanepadT I as well as Tense and Mood. Thus Sanskrit has following allomorphs of PN suffix. (The present and the future tenses have identical PN suffixes) TIM
Almanepada
Parasmai Pada
--- --r--Sing.
r--'-
Dual
f-- -
-- -
Plural
1----'- r--- f - - -
-
-
(The VRT First 01 it takes the voice sign
.
-
-
-.-
Sing.
Dual
Plural
For an examplE
-_.- - - - ---
Present 1st pr
I mi I
I was I I mas I
1st pr
I e I
I wahe I
Imahel
Future
2nd pr
I si I
I thas I I tha I
2nd pr
I se I
I ithe I
Idhwel
3rd pr
I ti I
I tas I
3rd pr
I te I
I ite I
lantel
I anti I
(VRT + Form) +
following procedure: (VRT + Form) +
( I pac I + I a I
I paca I + I ti I Sing.
Dual
Plural
1st pr
!aml
I wa I
I ma I
1st pr
2nd pr
I s I
I tam I
I ta I
2nd pr
I thas I lithaml
Idhwaml
3rd pr
I t I
I tam I
I an I
3rd pr
I ta I
I anta /,
r--'-
Sing.
Dual
Plural
I Pacati I
- - 1---- - - - - - - --.- --.- - - I i I
I wahi I
I mahi I
The structu ral
Past
--~-.--.----.
Sing.
.Dual
Impera- 2nd pr ive
3rd pr
the following diagrar
- - - - - _ --. - - - - - - ..
Sing.
Plural
--- - - - - - -_.- - - - ' - - , 1st pr
I itam I
CI
Dual _.
--
Plural _.
-.-
I ni I
I wa I
I ma I
1 st pr
I ai I
I wahai I Imahail
I 0 I
I tam I
I ta I
2nd pr
I swa I I tham I
Idhwaml
I tu I
I tam I
I ant'; I
3rd pr
I tam I
lantaml
I itam I
-------------------~-----
Dual
Sing.
Plural
Sing.
Dual
Plural
I wahi I
I mahi I
-_. - - - - - - - - - , - - - - --.-
--- - 1st pr
I am I "wa I
I ma I
1st pr
I a I
2nd pr
I s I
I tam I
I ta I
2nd pr
I thas I I atham I Idhwaml
3rd pr
I t I
I tam I
I us I
3rdpr
(ta I
Poten-
tial
.-
I atam I
".
.J 70
..J
"-::'.
ran I'
. .
.
",""
•.
::: ,.
"
",".
;"~MOR;:~OG' o,"t~ '"'M"':~ru"Y:
I i::
, into account the VerbTI as well as Tense and "N suffix. (The present )
The active verb is generated thus :
(VRT + Form) + VOC + TIM + PN c'
~
, I~
Atmanepada
-------Dual Plural _.- -_.- -_.-
Ing. e I
I wahe I
Imahel
se I
I ithe I
Idhwel
te I
I ite I
Ian tel
(The VRT First of all takes the formative and prepares the base, then it takes the voice sign and the allomorphs ofT/M and then takes PN suffix.). For an example, the verb/pacati/ can be generated through the following procedure: (VRT + Form) + VOC + TIM + PN
( I pac I + I a I ) + I 0 I + I 0 I + I ti I.
-------Ing. Dual Plural _.- -_.- -_.i I
I wahi I
I paca I + I ti I I Pacati I
I mahi I
thas I flthaml
Idhwaml
ta I
I anta /.
I itam I
The structural complexity of the active verb form can be seen from the following diagram.
-------Ing.
Plural
Dual
_.- ----
ai I
-'--
I wahai I Imahail
swa I '/ tham I
'-
Idhwaml
.
tam I .Fitam I
lantaml
--_._---Ing.
Dual
Plural
a I
I wahi I
I mahi I
-- -_.- --'-.
thils I I atham I Idhwaml ta I
I atam I .
I ran I" .
.
.' "
:':..,:~
",
.
......
..
".
'.. ...
<• • , .;"
. ·THEMORPHOCOOy'OF .... •
•
,
"/.>
71
The Passive Verb-forr
THE ACTIVE VERB-FORM THE BASE VRt
THE SUFFIX
Formative . Voc . ,
TIM (pp)
1st 'pr. 10 I
of
.3-I-al
Verb-
4-I-ayal
Roots
5-i-ri"
(AP)
,,--s
',--·s
Allom- 1-/-al orphs . 2-I-ya,1
D
D
nd
pro
2
D
pro
D
3~ pr..
7-I-null.-nol 8-I-n-1
~s
31d pro
D
D
-p
'---- p
.--S
~s
1 51 pro
The Formative :
D
-la-I
2nd pro
D
-p
'--5 31d pro
D
D
-p
P
-s
-s
1 \ pro
1st pro
D
S
D
I gam I + I
-5
,--s
I ni I + lye
D
I dr$ I + I I I budh I + I
2nd pro
D
'---- P
P
-5 31d pro
,-S 3"" pro
D
D
-po
'---- p
-S 1 sl pro
1
51
P
-:-- s
'-s
,D
2nd pr. .
According to ther of TIM and PN suffi: The Allomorphs of This remains thE. The PN Suffix : '
-p
----.:, 5
. '-5:. . 0 .,:: .", :P:. ,c· \ ,
3rt!
D., '
:'
"
D
~P'
"
I ram I + I
r.
D
pro
-p
31d pro
I
-5
D
2nd pro
72
e.g
-p
1.0 /
..
This I - yaJ is tre1 it takes the place of th to the VRT and prep~
-p
2nd pro
'l-il
The passive verb· indicates passivity. Th is joined to all the Vf
p
-s
Potential
The Voice-sign :
2nd pro
D
31d pro
Imperative
~S
D
~s
Past
L....:.... P
,The passive verbgeneration of the vert
1 sl pro
-p
10-I·nall-nil
The different grou while preparing the pc take formative. DifferE useless here.
L....:.... P
-s
·I-syal
The Verb-Roots :
'--.S nd
-p
Future
(VRT + Form) + "
'r--- P
,--s 2
9-I·ull-01
. pl·pr.
P
Present
.. ·1-0 I
6-1-01
The parallel passi' Imperative and the Po' passive verb-form rem form of the verbal type
PN
p .. ;
p'r,
...
,"
.'
.
,-".
"
As has been see tHree persons and t~ (pp.da) condition Le. t '~~trnanapad~). p
The
,':' . ..c.· 'rf\.ltM6RPHOL6~yt ",
The Passive Verb-form : 'FIX
The parallel passive forms af the present, the Imperfect past, the Imperative and the Patential are faund. In ather tenses and maads, the passive verb-farm remains the same as that af the Active/atmanepadaJ farm af the verbal type. The farmula far gen'erating the verb is the same.
PN (AP)
s 0
(VRT + Farm) +
p
S
The different groups af the VRTs are nat meant to be remembered while preparing the p'assive Verb-farms because passive farm daes nat' take farmative. Different canjugations and their canjugatianal signs are useless here.
P
S 3" pro '---1-_ 0 P
The Formative :
S
.--1--
,The passive verb-farm daes nat take any farmative. It simplifies the generatian af the verb.
0
P
·s
The Voice-sign :
2'" pro f---I-- 0
The passive verb-farm takes I-ya-I as the Vaice sign. This I - ya - I indicates passivity. The striking characteristic af passive is I - ya I which is jained to. all the VRTs to. farm a passive verb-farm.
p
S 3" pro '---1-_ 0
This I - ya I is treated as, a farmative by traditianal Grammarians. So. it takes the place 6f the Active canjugatian sign in the passive. It is jained to. the VRT ?nd prepares a base.
P
S st
1 pr.
r--i-- 0
e.g
P
P
S
r'-+--
d(~
I
budh I + I ya I - I budhya I
I + I ya I + I
d(~ya
I
S
According to. them when the base is prepared, it takes the allamarphs af TIM and PN suffix:
0
The Allomorphs of TIM: '
P
This remains the same as that af the Active.
S
The PN Suffix: , '
2'" pro ,f--+-- 0 P
,.
S·
3" pro
I
I ram I + I ya I - I ramya I
0
P
1st pro
I gam I + I ya I - I gamya I I nT I + I ya I - I nTya I'
S 2'" pro f---I-- 0
3 11l pro
PN
TheVerb-Roots :
. 2'" pro f---I-- 0
,1 st pro
vac + TIM +
'-'-+----,- '0
,'p,
As has been seen in the farmatian af the Actiye Verb-Farm, there are , . three persons and three .numbers. They a're further conditianed by vaice ., (Pi3.da) conditian i.e. the active Vaice (Parasmaipaqa) and the Middle vaice " " (~tmanapada). The passive verb-form discard'the parasmaipada. So. there ::: :,
'.'
. .
."
.
,. TfutMoRPHOL6~YbF .... .-, :
"':1, ",'.., ,-
.~.'
~."
:-',
...---.-~-~--.-.- .... - -"-~--------'"
73
~I
remains only one pad a viz. latmanapada I. The PN suffix is also conditioned . by the allomorphs of Tense or Mood. Thus the PN suffix of the passive verb-form has only 36 conditions as against the active which has 72 conditions.
THE BASI
i
VAl
Forma
\
. Following are the allomorphs of PN suffix for generating the passive verb-form: Atmanepada
TIM
. Dual
Sing. Present/Future
Past
Potential
Imperative
Verb/0
Roots
Plural
1st pr
I eI
I wahe I
I mahel
2nd pr
I se I
I ithe I
I dhwe I·
3rd pr
I te I
I ite I
I ante I
Sing,
Dual
Plural
1st pr
I i I
I wahi I
I mahi I
2nd pr
I thas I
I itham I
I dhwam I
3rd pr
I ta I
I itam I
I anta I
Sing.
Dual
Plural
1st pr
I aI
I wahi I
I maili I
2nd pr
I thas I
I atham I
I dhwam I
3rd pr
I ta I
I atam I
I ran I
Sing.
Dual
Plural
1st pr
I ail
I wahai I
I mahai I
2nd pr
I swa I
I tham I
I dhwam I
3rd pr
I tam I
I itam I
I antam I
The passive verb is generated thus : (VRT + Form) + VOC + TIM + PN
T+ I ya I + I
( I pac I + I 0 I
Y--·
0 I + I te I ....
,.
I pac I + I ya I +- I 0 /.!f. I te I I pacyate/
,
.:
::: .~.:-. . . . ,. The formation caM be seen from the loJjb:Wlng:diagPCim-:':. '
..
. ",
,
..... , •...
'J •
"; ~ .
•
'-. -.
: ".:"
.' ,
.'.
.
;'-:
,"
.·TfI~;~~Reii6L6G
.' -" . • ~!",
74 :,:~
"",
. :.~ ... ' '~'.
I ,f' ,
;uffix is also conditioned N suffix of the passive 3 active which has 72
THE PASSIVE VEHB-FOHM THE BASE VRI
THE SUFFIX
Formative
Voe
TIM
PN
r-S
generating the passive
1st pro
D
L--p
Present - 1-0 I
pad a
Plural
'ahe /
/ mahe/
he /
10 I
Roots
I-ya I
D
p
Future
r-S
I-syal 3rd pro
D
-/ dhwe /
e /
L--p
/ ante /
al
r-S 1st
Plural
ahi!
Past
D
r-S 2nd pro
D
la-I
/ dhwam /
/
pro
p
/ mahi /
lam / ~m
r-S 2nd pro
Verb-
al
~p
/ anta /
r-S 3«1 pro
31
Plural
ahi /
/ mahi I
ham /
D ~p
r- S 1$\ P,r.
/ dhwam /
am /
D
L--p
/ ran /
,----S Imperative
II
Plural
3.hail
/ dhwam /
m/
/ antam /
2nd pro
D
1-0 I
~p
-S
/ mahai /
3m /
(AP)
3rt! pro
D
p ,---- S pi pro
p
:
. :i
Potential I-il ,
D
-'---- S
2'":.:p'-
D ~p
,
'."
'---'S .'.
diagram-: . -,,',
I; ,.
. '.~"
'.
j::-
. .. ." ':.. "-; . -"
3«1 PI-
.--,
; '"
. -_•. ...., <' :;"~'.::;; .
- ....
~'p
.::
.~
D
f::
.
75
:. -.
-.--.--~--~-~.---,-.
,
TIM -Theallomorr
The Causal Verb-form :
and the Passive.
The causal forms are formed thus : The PN Suffix: (VRT + form) + VOC + TIM + PN
Looking to the cli
The Verb-Roots:
Iparasmaipada/.. lnsol
The VRT takes its allomorphic form. This allomorphic form inoludes
It discards the pr
gUQa, Vrddhi or the lengthening 6f penultimate vowel. This allomorphic form
The verb-form of
is considered as a derived form by traditional Grammarians. e.g.
VRT
allomorphic forms for the causal
/ bhG I
/ bhaw /
/ budh I
/ bod/1 /
/ wah I
/ wah /
/ wis I
I wes I
mri /
/ marj /
(VRT + Form) + (/ bhaw I + I
(2)
I bhaw I + I aya
I bhawayati I The conditions 1 following diagram.
I
The formative : The' causal verb-form does not beget any formative. :
The Voice"sign :
.
.~
.
The causal. verb-form gets / - aya - I as a voice sign. This / -aya- I indicates causality. The striking characteristic of Causal is / -aya- / which . is joined to .all the VRts to form a Causal verb-form. (VRT + form) + VOC ( /bhaw/ + / . ( /bodh I + I
(2) / ) (2)
I )
+ I aya / - / bhawaya I
+I
aya / - I bodhaya /
( Iwah I + I
(2)
. ( /we€; I + I
(2)
I ) + I aya I - I wesaya (
( Imarj / + I
(2)
1-):+ I aya./ - I marjaya/ . ..... ..... TH~ MORPHOLOGY.OF.:.L: .•. . 76
I )+ /aya I - / wahaya I ":.'
~
, ..
--
~~
..------~.- ..
",
.'
.
..
".':':-~-,-,---~
THE'rJlORPHOLOGY 0 , .... . .. ,-
'
, TIM -The allomorphs ofTense/Mood are the same as that of the Active and the Passive.
The PN Suffix: Looking to the classical usage it appears that the causal uses only· Iparasmaipada/.lri some exceptional cases only it takes the latmanapadal rphic form inoludes
.It discards the PN suffix of atmanapada.
'lis allomorphic form llarians.
The verb-form of the causal is generated thus :
causal
[
(VRT + Form) + VOC + TIM + PN (I bhaw I + I I/J I ) + I aya I + I I/J I + I ti I
l bhaw /
+.t
aya I + I I/J.I + I ti I
. I bhawayati I
-
. The conditions for the causal verb-form can be seen from the following diagram.
:ive.
sign. This I -aya- I al iSl'-aya-1 which
.',
THE MORPHOLOGY OF.- :.....
77
"
The Verb-forms of the
THE CAUSAL VERB-FORM THE BASE VRt
The Causal also
THE SUFFIX
Formative
TIM
Voc
PN
Present
Allomorphic
1-0 /
form of
2nd pro /':aya I
10 /
F:Jture
Verb-
VRT
-p
/ bhQ /
-S
/ budh /
D
/ wid / / diw /
-S 3 R1 pr.
Roots
e.g:
D
p
I-sya/.
ha~
The causal passive
(PP)
-s 151 pro
I
D
/ mrs /
-p
There are some casl -S pI pro
of the causal passive ar
D
of such cases can be f
',-p Past
The formative :
-S 2nd pro
la-I
D
It does not take any fl
-p
causality.
-S 3 R1 pro
1 \ pro S
The Voice-Sign :
D
-P
As the characterisH
~S
passive forms. It is join verb.
D
-P Imperative
TIM:
-s 2nd pro
1-0 /
The TIM allomorp~
D ~P
The PN Suffix :
-s 3rd
pro
As passive takes (
D
the PN suffixes of / Pi
-P
The verb-form of t
-s 1 sl pro
(VRT + Form) + V
D
-p Potential
2nd pro
I- i I
::'.:: , :-':"
···t~'··
. . . ' , -':-- P '",
.
I bhawyate / . ,the c,onditiohS of. .....
,:
frO[i1the;toliowing (jia( ".'
.
. ',,"
( bhaw i,,+ / ya /
D
,--p.
'3,,1 pr
" -~
'. :( / bhaw / + / 0 I
---:- S
"'..
.•..-:
.",
is'
'!
The Verb-forms of the Causal Passive: The Causal also has a passive variety (PP) !
The causal passive takes the allomorphic form of the VRT.
-E~
VRT
The Allomorphic form
I bhO I
I bhaw I
-E~
I budh I
I.bodh I
I wid I
I wed I
-E~
I diw I
I dew I
I mes I
I mars I
,
e.g:
P
P
p
There are·somecases where the forms of the simple passive and that of the causal passive are identical e.g. I gamyate I. The causal passivity of. such cases can be known from the context alone.
-E~
The formative:
-E~
It does not take any formative. The allomorphic form of theVRT indicates
p
causality.
-E~
The Voice-Sign :
p
As the characteristic features of the passive, I - ya I occurs in causal 'passive forms. It is' joiried to" the allomorphic form of the VRT to form a ' verb.
-E~
TIM:
-E~
The TIM allomorphs remain the same as that of the Active.
p
The PN Suffix:
-E~
As passive takes only I atmanapada I the causal passive discards the PN suffiXeS of I Parasmaipada I.
p
l ,<
The verb-form of the causal passive can be generated thus :
-E~
-E
(VRT + Form) + ,:..
s
,.
p'
/ + I ya I + I ,0 I
+I te I
. -.'
/. bhawyate / '
-E~ ,
PN
, " :( I bhaw I + I 0 I ) + I ya I + I 0 I + /te I
J bhaw
,~,D
vac + TIM +
.. , ....::
,the conditions ollhe verb-form of the causar~p'q;ssive can be seen frorrj tMeJollowing tjiagrar.n._.
, p,
'.
bRPHOl;OGY qF,.; .. .. :':-.,' 'i"
-:
.
. .:
".,
. :~
,"
..
".
.....
.~,
.
THE CAUSAL-PASSIVE VERB-FORM THE BASE
The Participles :,
THE SUFFIX
The second type of
.'
VRt
Formative
Voc
TIM
PN
I gatawan I in I ramal) gal
,-S 1sl pro
~p
Present
Allomorphic
r--- S
1-0 I
lonn
2nd pro
01
10 I
I-ya I
Verb Roots
It conveys the meaning c q{{q{OI ~1;:Hi'i:(q1 ;;no: I
D
Future
I-syal 3 rt1 pro
. According to V.S. Aptt
D p
participation or sharing i
,-S
the noun" (P.93). Excep'
D
participles are regarded;
'--p
because they agree with t
--S 1st pro
they qualify.
D
The construction of
'--p Past
2
la-I
nd
pro
r--S
the present participle, n
D
suffix is direclty added te
~p
the verbal forms. They 1
r-S 3ft!
pro
D
(VRT + Form)
-I
~p'
.
All other participles.
-S l,st
!Jr.
.'
D
VRT
-p
The VRTs:
-S Imperative
2nd pro
1-0 I
31d pro
151 pro
D -p
The Participles do nt
,--S
their different formative
D ~p
The Participative Suff
r-S
The Suffix is directl
D
potential participle has
p
one suffix_
-S
..
Potential
2nd pro
I -i J
GNC:
D
---'-'-' p
. " ~. .'.3:td
'" .:.
...
'.
+ Participi.
pr::,
'.' '.' Whenparticiple'isal . '. .. . .
r---.S :: .. j) .. '. "
suifix8s of the
[1O.un
t6
p
.:':THEMORPHOEOGYOF/::;' . '.'" "
..•. -
1'" ~O"""'OG' o~ •
FORM
The Participles :, The second type of the verb-phrase is the participial construction.
PN
I gatawan I in I ramal) gatwan I functions as the head of the verb-phrase.
s
It conveys the meaning of an action just as the verbal type e.g. ~ q{{q~ol 411'1{~l'1ql ;;mr: I ~ ~'1q,qcp:l'O:lIfuct'4+j, I
,..--+-- 0. P
S
.
1-+--'0.
According to V.S. Apte "They are called 'Participles' from the supposed
P
participation or sharing in the functions of the verb, the adjectives, and,
s
the noun" (P.93). Except the indeclinables and the absolutives all the
'--+-- 0.
participles
p
a~e regarded as the adjectives by the traditional G~ammarians
because they agree with the Gender; the number and the case olthe nou.ns
s ,..--+-- 0.
they qualify.
P
The construction of the participle is simplerthan the verbal. Except
S
the present participle, none of them take any formative. The participial
I--+-- 0.
suffix is direclty added to the VRT. The present participles are formed like
p
the verbal forms, They follow the formula of the verb-forms i:e. '
S
'--+-- 0.
(VRT + Form) + VOC + TIM + PN.
p'
All othe.r participles ,are formed thus:
s ,..--+-- 0.
VRT
+ Participial
Suffix + GNC
P
The VRTs :
s Ic-+-- 0.
The Participles do not take any formative.So different verb-groups and
p
their different formative signs are not required;
S
'--+-- 0.
The Participative Suffix:
p
.-+---
s
The Suffix is directly joined to the VRT.lt has no variation. Only the
0.
potential participle has three variants. Where as all the participles have
p
one suffix.
s I-+-- 0. "
GNC: ,
P
' '
When participle Isalreadyformed it takes the Gender-Number and case . ...' .... . .
S ~+--o.
,
.
,
-'.
suffixes cif the no.iJn to which it agrees.'
0'
p
, .,~
"
.
. ';.
EMORPHOLOGY OF,"::"
.~f
'THE, MORPHOLOGY' OF ;:.:",. , .
__ L-'
0:
,"': . . . . " ' . . . " . .
.
""
:
,
Types of Participles: There are three types of participles - The Active, The Passive and The I ndeiclinables. The Passive
The Active 1. The Present
The Indeclinables
1.The Present 1.The Indeclinables or ·the Absolutives
l!
In the present partie change does not occur. I the base does not end
·l
( I su I + I nu
\
I
I sunu I + I (/)
f
I Sunwat I)
f
2. The Past
2.The Past
3. The Perfect
3.The Future
4. The Future
4.The Potential
2.The Infinitives
(VRT + Form)
(ii) I atmanapada is I mana I or I in I a (i.e. th I ana I is adde
r
The Indeclinables : The Indeclinables do not function as the head of the verb phrase. So
They are gene
their analytical study is irrelevant to the chapter.
(a)
The Active and The Passive Participles :
(I
Following is the procedure to generate a participial form.
I gaQa;
(b)
As has already been said above, only the present participles are formed like a verbal one.
(VRT·
( I su
vac +
I sunu
TIM + PS
I sunw
The Active Present Participle: The Active present participle is formed in two padas. (i)
I Parasmaipada I -The p'resent participative suffix oi I parasmaipada/
l
vac + TIM +
The Present passive The suffix of the I It is generated thl
is I at I. It is generated thus : (VRT + Form) +
ga~
I gaoa
The Present Participles : .
i.e. (VRT + Form) +
(VRT ,
(VRT + Form)
PN
( I gao I + I \
( I gao I + I aya I ) + I(/)I + I(/)I + I at I
I gao
I gaoaya I + I(/)1 + I(/)I + I at I'
+ I ya
I gaoyamariai
I gaoayat I 82
i
L
,
i---,----------------------
:
, The Passive and The
l i
In the present participle when base ends in I a t, the Morphophonemic change does not occur. Instead of being Igaoayat/ it remains Iganayat/, when the base does not end in I a I, the morpho-phonemic change occurs e.g. (VRT + Form) + VaG.+ TIM + PS
nables
( I su I + I nu I ) + I(/)I + I(/)I + I at I
les or -the Absolutives
I sunu I + I(/)I + I(/)I + I at I I Sunwat 1) (ii) I atmanapada 1 : The suffix of the I atmanapada I of the present is I mana I or I ana I. The I mana lis added to the verb ending in I a I (i.e. the verb Root which belongs to group (A), while
I ana I is added to the remaining verbs oj Group (8). )f the verb phrase. So
-i
They are generated thus : (a)
(VRT + Form) + VaG + TIM + PS
( I gaoa / + I aya I ) + I 0 I + I(/)I + I mana I ~ipial
form.
I gaoaya I + I(/)I + I(/)I + I mana I I gaoayamang I . (b)
participles are formed
(VRT + Form) + VaG + TIM + PS
( I su I + I nu I ) + I(/)I + I(/)I + I ana. I I sunu I + I(/)I + I(/)I + I ana I I sunwana I The Present passive participle:
padas.
The suffix of the present passive participle is I mana I.
jffix of I parasmaipada/
It is generated thus : (VRT + Form) + VaG + TIM + PS
( I gao I + I
It I
r gao
I/)
I ) + I ya I + I(/)I
-I'
I mana I
I + I ya I + I(/)I + I mana I
I gaoyamana /
MORPHOLOGY OF....
~
i.
_ ..___L
THE. MORPHciLOGY
__
OF .. :.
83
,
~
-
r
The Examples from the classical Sanskrit:
The Past Participles
~) . ~qlgq;'j
The Active:
~ g{~'IIfl't<1I+jCfi;(j1 I (Raghu. V1I1.1) f{ I fl;,"Hl'n\'lCfi61 I Pc! tl '1:
'<)
m~1T{q"W
@<;;""fq ~
31 ~ I{"l '1f.1 \'I '14 i
~1'i1C;'t""'
mrm Pc! 'lit ¥
'1 il '1 q I\):(1!;1 f{ {: I
I'tRl~'a\'l: II
VRT 4- PS +
1 gao 1 + 1 tE
I
q~i;w\
trot
It is the same in
l
'ii§\'4
f
It I
1 gal)itawat 1 The Passive : It ha: VRT + PS +
(Sii.l)
1 gao 1 + 1 t1
The Future Participles: The future participles are simpler than the present participles. They do not take any formative neither in the Active nor in the Passive. It hq.s
I
Igaoha 1 + (
I
In the past passi' (i.e. 1 In 1 or 1 n
!3uffix IsyatJ in the Iparasmaipadal and Isyamana! in the latmanepada!.
rr a
VRT + PS + G)\
The .passive is the same as that of the 1 atmanepada I.
Iram/+lt The Active Parasmaipada
1 rata 1 + Gt
VRT + PS + GNC
1 nam 1 +J'
1 gao 1 + 1 syat 1 + GNC
1 nara
1 gaoi!?yat 1 + GNC .
r+
G
1 han 1 +
rt
1 hata 1 + G The 1 atmanepada 1 & Passive,
The Participles of t
VRT + PS + GNC
As the characteri: form of the VRT, w~
1 gao 1 + 1 syamana 1 + GNC
(i)
L
/ gaoisyamaoa 1 + GNC
The 1 Par . VRT
Examples from classical Sanskrit.
.~)
'<) .
Cfi\):I\Q+jIGI:~~rt ~1{if{'1'"!. I (Raghu. III. 52)
~)
~ C;~TR:t\S1O{Ih4+j1r<11; i
4fc:: ~r ~ L;pii'1I.1!+ q \):<4-iP1o~ '.«rm. ..
.......•.
1 jagaowa
,
_
.. _ - - - - ' -
(;i)
r
The 1 atrr .VRT
." :
+ P:
.. '/ jagao 1
I.
. . 1 jagaOan ..
84
P~
1 jagao 1
q;:qIf.:
'
+
"
,.\. .
rHEMdRj:>HOLOG~(OF....
.
l~
TH~.MOBPHOLdGY ( . . '"
",."
I
The Past Participles : The Active:
It has suffix I tawat I.
It is the same in both the padas. VRT
+ PS
+ GNC
. I gal) I + I tawat I +GNC I gal)itawat I +.GNCc The Passive : It has suffix I ta I as its participial suffix . . VRT + PS + GNC
sa.l)
I gal) I + I ta 1+ GNC Igal)ha I + G.ND lsent participles. They
In the past passive participle when the VRT ends in / m I or/r)/, they (i.e. I In I or I n f) are elid{.: .
. in the Passive. It has . in the latmanepadaJ.
VRT + PS + GN;:;
pada I.
I ram I + I ta I + GNC'
I rata I + GNC I nam I +J ta I + GNC I nata I + GNC . I han I +
r ta
I +" GNC
I hata I + GNC' The Participles of the Perfect Past: As the characteristic features of the perfect past, it takes the allomorphic form of the VRT, which has the reduplication of its first syllable. L
(i)
The I Parasmaipada I - It takes the suffix I was I . VRT + PS + GNC
I jagal) I + I was I + GNC (Ragh. 11.8)
I jagaQwas I + GNC; (;i)
52)
The I atmanepada I: It has lana I as. its participative suffix. . VRT + PS +GNC
. I jagal) I + I am~;~ GNC .
I
.
""
.
. • I jagal)~na I + GNC .' . ,",'
E"MdRPMOLOGY' . .' . OF'-...... '
. 85
Examples from the classical Sanskrit. ~)
=If'1T''li"
-3'!Ri'1ctl;:1C;'4~iRdlor ..:l
~
IT
,~
~) ~,'f IUJlfH: ~-sm ";f:"
1FI '1 en
~ 1'!' "i1 <"11
"'q"
fl f{¢;q 1
fl"Il'1 <1 '«ffi"l '10 i ~ .
~ ~
~)
:rr
'Tn: l'l"llqRi: II
~ Hqlo;q\'UWIj!'l«1 I
(58.15)
e
We will compare
(Ragh. v.34)
and then the verbal a
The Potential Passive Participle: Compared to the t
It is also known as the verbal adjective in traditional Grammar. It has '3 aliomorphs I tawya I, I anTya I & I ya I. It had one more aliomorph viz. I elima I in vedic but it is not used in the classical Sanskrit.
Verbal forms have lot: than one variants. Thi
I tawya I formations VRT + PS + GNC
I The
I gao I + I tawya I + GNC
I
Igaoitawya 1+ GNC
I anTya I formations VRt
VRT + PS + GNC
I
I gao I + I anTya I + GNC
1,2, ... N
IgaOanTya I + GNC
I ya I f()rmations VRT + PS + GNC
I
I gao I + I ya I + GNC
The
Igaoya I + GNC
Examples from the classical Sanskrit. . . ,
~)
i
.~
VRt
;
~ ~ My;i)'1''ll-SU ~. I '1
tITti- ,!~~-S~'1
"".,.,
-,.,---~
I
1
(uttar.4)
THE MORPHOLOGY-OF ....
L
THE MORPHOLOGY 'OF . -. . .. ,
~m;: >her
~)
dlF1H11~
Kif1l:
II (Raghu. VI. 77)
'1 &'<1'1 Ii'id m1T ~ I'!' 'f1(i\[
(i:I<:[T
Rlpq
'icl 'll fl:1
'11tl4 141-t '1 i1: ~)
(Sa.15)
I itional Grammar. It has 1e more allomorph viz. . cal Sanskrit.
.~ ~ ~
@,.,lH'I [ft q [ft
r
y;wpi'll
tIt
~ 't~m
;f ~
"q
~
-
-
('ql.'ff .
i1"i!: ~ ~
II
(sa.4)
ql'cll@41 '1&'<1'11<'4 m1T I (Raghu.XIV-61)
We will compare and contrast the verbal forms of Active and Passive and then the verbal and the participial forms. Compared to the Active, the Passive has less complexities. The Active Verbal forms have lots of variants. Most of the constitutents have more than one variants. This can be seen from the following diagrams . The Active Verb
I The Base
The Suffix
I [
Voc
Form
VRt
TIM
PN
[
[
4
72
",
[
o
,10
1,2, ... N
The Passive Verb
I The Suffix
The Base [
(uttarA)
VRt
Forni
I
I .0'
1
: MORPHOLOGY. OF. ....
THE .MORPHOLOGY 'OF . . - . . ,
.... ...L._, _ _~
....
'87
\.. -
Voc
TIM
I
I
I
... 1
4
36
PI\!
The VRTs : (a)
As the Active verb-forms take formative, the different groups of the verb roots are to.be remembered while forming the verb. The passive verb-form does not take formative s.o different groups of the VRTs are not required to be remembered,
(b)
The Passive verb is formed only in I atmanepada I . (even thqugh the root may belong.to I parasmaipada I only). This simplifies the formation ofthe passiv~ verb. On account of this, different padas of the VRTs are not required to be remembered.
Thus, tl}e verb fe complex on account ( (viz. VRT, formative, T The passive construe verb grou'ps are not t( and the PN suffixes The most compie are ten different veri formative. Moreover, : conjugation signs e.(
. The Formative :
I nu I - I no I ,
To form an active verb, ten groups of the VRTs are essential to be remembered because they have different conjugation signs. These '. conjugation signs are used as formative in the Active Verb-forms. So the different conjugation signs are also to be remembered. Moreover, 10 different formatives of Active undergo many morphophonemic changes. It adds to the complexity of the total verb-form. As against this, the passive verb is formed without any formative. This simplifies the formation of the passive verb.
The Voice-sign.: As Active is considered as a basic one, it is left unmarked. The passive . verb-form takes I - ya / as a voice-sign. On account of this, the Passive verb has one more constitutent. But the addition of I -. ya- I is simple. It has no variants. It does not compell any morphophonemic change. It is simply added to the VRT. This addition does not, as such, add to the complexity of the verb-formation.
TIM: The auxilliary allomorphs of Tense & Mood remain the same in both . theconslructions, so they do not contribute either in simplifying or in complexifying any of the construction.
The PN suffix <.: The Activeverb-forms have both thEi padas i.e. the I parasrnai I a,nd . .. the I. atmaneIwhe~eas. the passive verb-forms .dis6ardthe I parasmaipada·I.:t~us, the'passive,verb-formsha~e only allomorph$ of PN suffix whei:eas the'ACtive v~rb;forms have 72 variants'.ofPN~uifix:· .
3,6
"-'",
88
;,:~'.
',
..
THE MORPHOLOGyOi= .. ;: .' .
This diversity of. total verb-phrase. M( during the formation VRTs belonging to It to the group B. Bec morphophonemic ch changes are there, It consonant. changl e.g. I bibheti nro I bhuj I. Thus, while verb-form, the spea change, which area In the active COl does not depend on more or less convenl which may prove to b every now and ther seems, forced the sl of structural simplicit to that of the active c to opt for the pass The com parisI ..th~preserit particif ........ ,VRT+ PS . . ...... . .:~
.
.<'
~.~
:.'
- ...-
- . - ... -------.------,-----~------------ . . . .
the different groups of l forming the verb. The 1 s.o different groups of ered, epada I. (even thQugh lly). This simplifies the of this, different pad as llbered.
-s are essential to be Jgation signs. These ve Verb-forms. So the . Moreover, 10 different lic changes .. It adds to :his, the passive verb rmation of the passive
Thus, the verb formation of the Active construction, in Sanskrit is complex on account of the allomorphic variations. The four constitutents (viz. VRT, formative, TIM and PN suffix) have more than one allomorphs. The passive construction is simpler compared to that of tlie Active. The verb grou'ps are not to be remembered, the formatives do 'not take place, and the PN suffixes of the I parasmaipada / are discarded.
!
i
The most compiex part of the Active verb-form is its formatives. There are 'ten different verb-groups having .ten different conjugation signs as formative. Moreover, some of the ten groups have more than one different conjugation signs e.g.
I
I I
/ nu I - / no I,
r
I!
or I u / - / 0 I, or / na / - I ni I.
This diversity of .the conjugation signs .adds to the complexity of the total verb-phra~e. Moreover, the morphophonemic change which occurs during the formation of the Base also adds to the structural complexity. VRTs belonging to the group A are easier compared to those belonging to the group B. Because their ,bases end in I ~ a I and they have less morphophonemic changes compared to the Group B. Moreover, whatever, changes are there, they are the vowel changes which are simpler than the consonant changes. The group B ha~ consonant changes too e.g. I bibheti I,from the root I bhT I and Ibhunaktil from the root . / bhuj I. 1hus, while preparing the base for the generation of the active verb-form, the speaker has to remeniber the rules of morphophonemic change, which creates a lot of strain. '
r:
nmarked. The passive 1t of this, the Passive of / -. ya- I is simple. lphonemic change. It , as such, add to the
In the active construction, the selection from the various allomorphs does not depend on any regular phonetical or grammatical condition. It is more or less conventional.The learner has to remember all these conditions which may prove to be tiresome. The morphophonemic changes Which occur every now and then also adds to the complexity. These complexities, it seems, forced the speakers towards the reduction and to achieve the goal of structural simplicity. The verb-formation of the passive is simpler compared to thai of the active construction. This seemst~ have motivated the speakers to opt for the passive verbal forms .
;.,';."',
lain the same in both r in simplifying or in
. The' comparison of the verbal and:·theparticipi~lforms : Except ·.·the present participles all the p.articipfeshave three constitutents :
. the / parasmai / and. forms .discard the.· e only 3.6allomorphs variantsofPNsuffix: .
. .; ....... ::. ':VRT'+ PS·+·'GNC : ...:
.-;. . . "
.
·MORPHOLOGV.OF .. ;; ....
": ,:
.'
'~',:'" :.
".;..
....:.; - .'
'..:'.. '
..::: "
'
. ::
.;l ,.,
.
While the verbal forms have five consitutents : (VRT + Form) +
vac +
CHAPTER-
o
TIM + PN.
The present participle is not frequently used i.e. it is not used more than the verbal forms of the present. There is no other simplicity in present participle except the PN suffix. It takes the formative in the active and the voice-sign in the passive. So the present participle is not more convenient than the verbal-form to the speaker. The Present participle, as such, did not replace the verb as the head of the construction as the past participle did. Amongst the participles the construction is very simple. They do not take any formative suffix. . The PN Suffix-The participial construction do not take any PN Suffixes. To find an appropriate PN allomorph, the learner is required to know the . group of the VRT and the pada ofthe ·VRT. The participial suffix is directly joined to the VRT. When the VRT belongs to the group which takesli I before participial suffix, then it takes I i I otherwise, the suffix is directly joined. When the participle is already formed it takes the Gender-Number and the Case suffix of the nOun to which_ it qualifies. The complexity and the simplicity of the verbal and the participial forl')1s can be seen from the following diagram.
I
I
e~
According to Malinows of language in use. S of action shapes its E The Context :
The context effects of Discourse ' : 1983) language only in contE created problems for Longacre these probl "Among these pr pronominalizatiori anc understanding of tem _ temporal and spatia dislocation, and othe
in connected context where to use and whe
The Suffix
I
I -Form
I
some message, to
other sequence sign<
The Base
VRt
social actions. It is a lin
and other focus pher
The Passive Verb
I
Language being a
Voc
TIM
I
PN
I
I
of 'The Grammar
0
These problerr
Active-1,2, .. , N
10
0
4
72
morphological and sl is able to fulfill that
Passive 1
o
1
4
36
an utterance accura
Participle1
V •
90
_
....- - - - - - - - - - ' - -
10
The utterances GNC
a structural series, 1 theinterpreia,tion of
-tHE III\ciRPHOlOGY OF .:.• :
-THE PRAGMATI6-"FU~
..
----.~~------
I
,f'
CHAPTER - 4 THE PRAGMATIC FUNCTION OF SANSKRIT PASSIVE
l
it is not used more lr simplicity in present :ive in the active and is not more convenient :lrticiple, as such, did as the past participle 9.
{ simple. They do not
i
i I
J
[, ,
Language being a means of communication, is able to create unified social actions. It is a link in concreted human activity. It is uttered to convey som~ message, to express some feeling and to g~t something done.
I
According to Malinowski Pragmatic functions stand very near to the heart
,i
of language in use. So the pragmatic use of speech within the context
I
I
I, ,
take any PN Suffixes. required to know the
of action shapes its structure. The Passive is one of such structures. The Context : . The context effects much to the language in use. Longacre (The.Grammar of Discourse' : 1983) dedicates his book to the thesis that language .is language only in context. The study of utterances without their context has
Vhen the VRT belongs fix, then it takes / i /
created problems for correct understanding of utterance. According to Longacre these problems are. "Among these problems have been deixis and the use of articles;
Gender-Number and
. pronominalization and other anaphoric ways.referring to a partiGipant; better understanding of tense, aspect, niode and voice in verbs; use ofopticinal
d the participial forms
,
temporal and spatial expressions; the function of .extra-position, leftdislocation, and other such features; subject selection, object selection and other focus phenomena; the function and thrust of conjunctions and other sequence signals; and the function of mystery particles which occur in connected context in some languages, which the native speaker knows
l Suffix
where to u'se and where not to use, but which defy translation:' (Introduction
I ~
of 'The Grammar of Discourse' 1983)
PN
These problems need much more information apart from the
I
morphological and syntactic structure of the utterance and only the 'context'
72
is able to fulfill that need to enable us to explain the given structure of
36
'an utterance accurately. The utterances are not spoken at random but are strung together in
GNC
a structural series, the background knowledge plays an important role in the interpretation of the utterances. Ac'cording to Brown & Yule (Discourse
M.ORPHOLOGY OF
.~,:
L'"'
,"AG"':"'O'C"o,o:"_"
The Intonation & ThE
Analysis: 1983) "Doing 'Discourse Analysis' certainly involves 'Doing syntax and semantic' but it primarily consists of 'Doing Pragmatics' (P.26). As
As the spoken fo
Brown & Yule believe that it is necessary to know who the listner is and
examination it is difficL
also the time and place of the prod.uction of discourse. The study of pragmatics
the stress variants. Mu
is based on the Use of language in context. Therefore, it is concerned with
tradition pertains to tt
the relationships between the speaker and the utterance and not amongst
phonemes. Sanskrit ~
th~ utterances themselves.
on clause level. So it i and stress as the packi
As the background knowledge plays an important role in the
The Placement:
understanding of an utterance, it shows that each and every utterance contains some known matter and some new matter which is to be informed
Sanskrit has basi
by that utterance. This information needs some linguistic packaging or the
Any order other thar
conveyance from the originator to the receiver. The informer (or the speaker
placement or rather th
or the originator) has to select 'such a packaging. variant so that his
variant of Sanskrit. It is
information can be received accurately and effectively and should be
or for directing the di
sufficiently potential to express the intentions and attitudes of the originator.
t!
The Packaging Variants :
used for (1) The topi Following are the (1)
In the selection of the different packing variants for different pragmatic perspective conversational maxims play ·an important role. According to
i
~ -~!'i5i i "ct-<
Grice they are the'Conventional implicatures' i.e. the conventional meaning
[DUrmClkh,
of the words used'. (as quoted by Brown & Yale in 'Discourse Analysis
i
spy]
P.31:1 9"85) They are supported by'Quality', 'Quantity', 'Relation' and 'Manner'.
The object
The selection of the packaging devices of information depends upon the (ii)
common knowledge of the originator as well as the receiver of the utterance.
Another eXe last act the
The social relations, the social roles and the social status of the originator and the receive, cause to select packaging variant. The pragmatic use of
In the first
J.
speech within the context of action shapes the surface structure of an utterance.
Udayana. l-
.mituT
~
-'1'
[Usually, th' have zest].
There is a wide range of syntactic option available for packing information. . They are.
(1)
The Intonation & fhe" Stress
(2)
The Placem~nt
(3)
The :Constr~ctiQnofthesedtence ..•
..
'-
_ .. _-----'-
{
.
Instead of he speaks'
\. ..
"
,:.".
". fortopi9alh . .;
.-
.. -_.. _---- ...
__ .. _.. __ ._----_._... __ ._. __ .. _.. _-_ .. -._._..
-------
The Intonation & The stress :
( involves 'Doing syntax Pragmatics' (P.26). As
As the spoken form of the Sanskrit language is not available for
who the listner is and
eKaminationit is difficult to consider the packaging by the intOnational and
rhe study of pragmatics
the stress variants. Much of the phonetic work done in Sanskrit grammatical
-e, it is concerned with
tradition pertains to the phonemic level i.e. Pronunciation and sandhi of
ance and not amongst
phonemes. Sanskrit grammars do not provide Intonation and Stress rules
.
.
on clause level. So it is difficult or rather impossible to analyse intonation .
.
and stress as the packaging variant as far as classical Sanskrit is concerned.
nportant role in the
r
and every utterance (hich is to be informed
The Placement: Sanskrit has basic SOV (Subject-Object-Verb) type of construction.
listic packaging or the
Any order other than this is to convey some additional meaning. The
Ormer (or the speaker
placement or rather the displacement is also one of the syntactic packaging
1 variant so that his
varia·nt of Sanskrit. It is employed for catching the attention of the participants
:ively and should be
or for directing the·discussion in a particular direction. The placement is
udes of the originator.
used for (1) The topicalization and for (2) the End-focussing. Following are the examples of dislocations for Topicalization.
)r different pragmatic
(1)
nt role. According to .
"U+1:-~.f.Si I"d '
onventional meaning 'Discourse Analysis elation' and 'Manner'.
In the first act of Uttara Ramacharitam, Rama speaks-
W:,
<.l l111T
eft '(;it I'1 q ~ IX! q:a c\:
~ I
[Durmukh, a man of good character was appointed by me as a
.•
spy] The object is left-dislocated for topicalization.
n depends upon the ·iver of the utterance.
(ii)
Another example is from the Swapna-Vasavadattam, where in its
ItUS of the 6"riginator
last act the chamberlain conveys the message of Mahasena to
1e pragmatic use of
Udayana. He says-
ace structure of an
.m
~*' fll('HI%~q ~ I
[Usually, the wealth of the kingdom is enjoyed by only those who have zest].
packing information. L. !
Instead of. having . {41(;HI%h ~*' ~ I " . he speaks ~m:{~l(,(il~q
~.IHere; the object is forwarded
. for.topicalisation .... r."
'
... ;
le~UNCTION
of...:: .
......... .
.
. . THEPRAGMATICfU~CT10N OF. ..•. ·
93·
..•. ,
(iii)
. ~ "l4Iqi'!>\1I, ;:r
'q
m.:mr
I
*IT
[The girl was kidnapped but not protected by me.] The object is left dislocated for topicalization. . Following are the example of End-focussing a certain object that is directing the
0)
The Active:
Again, in the same act and play Udayana says-
atten~ion
on a particular object.
In the fourth act of Pratimana\akam, a door-keeper named 'Nandinika' says
I I
The Active type I Following are some of tl type. of construction is
\
(1) In the second ( Cheti and Vasavadatta
i
f
1 i
PadmavatT is a prince: coriversation is inform, so neither officialdom
\ qIW\;;'<\1
- ;:r' ~
~
[Friend, Prince Bharat was seen by us with eagerness] Instead of saying ~ ~ ~ she says
:w:tf:
q '>11 q <11
-
qj{~q;;'al
- ~
end-focussing. (ii)
In the first act of
sakuntalam, Sotradhara says to Na\L
~, ~~ qfM~4i I [Lady, this assembly is composed of learned men] [Padmavati - 0 ~ jeel
This is also an example of right-dislocation to focus on the Parishad, the Object. (iii)
Again, in Uttara Ramacharitam,
Vasvadatta - No
Vasanti asks Rama
100
ilRf):JC;"l"liI£['i1R1R8
Padmavati - Go Vasvadatta - All
focussed.
Ma
The construction of the sentence: .
The constructi.on of a sentence is also cine of the important packaging variants. The effed of the fact depends upori how it is' represented. San::;krit has two types of construction (1) The Active and (2) The Passive;
94
-
"." .~--.~--.--.-
..
'--
... -. _.....-
-
THE PRAGMATIC FUNCTION ·OF. .••.
I
Padmavati ' Wt
\I
, Vasvadatta - P n he
1 !
M;'i.id
. - Th
THE.PRAGM,ATW FUN
I
says-
,
The Active type of construction is used in informal situations. Following are some of the examples of informal Situations, where the active type. of construction is used.
by me.] ion. I a certain object that )ject. joor-keeper named
(1) In the second act of Swapna. the dialogues between Padmavati, Che\i and Vasavadatta (in the disguise of Avantika) are informal. Though
I r
eagerness] Instead .~ '+R
The Active:
PadmavatT is a princess and Vasavadatta belongs to a higher level their conversation is informal. They are young girls playing with each other, and so neither officialdom nor formality necessitated.
-
ql@c;'t11
- '1
f4>fliC;lrtl '1i'1%f{i(!fliq ~
ft;
'1
ft; I ~, ~ ~mm
.~ ~
it ~ 1T~{
I
q'ill
-~! ~ '11,!qgf( I ,
qI {Nc;'t1I
- q<:!lf{"1 ,);w\1¢1 '<'lRl"4"'1t>ioil'1q~
q 'ill
- q;
q 1@C;'t11
- 3H<'{'iiI [{.j rt~,,:j'l mIT ~ .."..,
of the sentence for
says to Nati.
:mit
Q"lI<1ct1
1:f"f
'1 t> Ioil
'1l .."..,
I
~ €!MqR'1l olf.11-a '1t>I:il'1 ~ I
eo men] lcus'on the Parishad,
,~
- '<'l1 ~
:m
~ ~
I.
[Padmavati - 0 Noble lady, why are you looking at me as if you are jeering?
.:'t:
'orthy work done by
Vasvadatta - No '" No ... Oh. ! You look gorgeous today, and I feel looking at it from all angles.
ated. To focus Rama
Padmavati - Go away, Please ! Don't ridicule me.
;anti.asks Rama ~;,'"
t dislocated or End-
Vasvadatta - All right, I will keep mum. 0 Future Queen of Mahasena! Padmavati - Who is that Mahasena ?
nportant packaging !presented. Sanskrit ) The Passive.
Vasvadatta - Pradyota, the King of Ujjain, is known as Mahasena as he commands a vast army. Maid
rIC FUNCTION OF.....
'- The Princess does not wish him as her husband.] . ' : . . !i5
~~~--.---~~~~~-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.-~~~~~~~~~--~~~-
This dialogue contains all the utterances in the active type of construction.
[Priyamwada - Dear
It is far from formality. It is a casual talk between friends, void of their respective social statuses.
sakuntala
- Wha1
Priyamwada - For, \
(ii) Another dialogue is from the third act of Pratima, which has taken place between two servants, viz.Sudha~ara & Bhata.
- ~. ~ ''f'f! Rtiflic;I"I"i
-
~
+IT,
- "f!lfuf e
pose sakuntala
;or ~ ?
Henc
(iv) Another examplE
~ lW( I
Rama and Sita - a husb,
~ C!>\1:<SQfu I
is uneasy because .her Ul1:
- ~ l111 C!>ictQi4'81 "'i!3'Hi3"ii ;orrfur I - "'i!3*1$~Oi ~ ~ ?
-~~,"l.1 WRT~
- C
mm - 1"11 r'i ;jj
'>!"C:
- ~ ~ 'f'f ! . ~ .rr~-mf1:r I
[Bhata
- Ah, you whore's son! Why don't you attend to your duty now? .
Sudhakara Bhata
"i
.
Beat me, Beat me ..
. [Rama - Oevi' Vaide~ They are OUI
- Beaten, what will you do ?
The agniho
Sudhakara - Unfortunate me I have' not got a thousand arms like Kartavirya. Bhata
~
performanc Sita
- What have you to do with a thousand arms ?
- I know, My causes mis
Sudhakara - I will kill you
Rama - It is true. P
Come on, you whore's son! I. will leave you only when (you are) dead.]
and having
(iii) Another example is from sakuntalam act I. The talk is between sakuntala & Priyamvada.
These'dial<
Bhata
heart get ro situations. j'
The Passive:
I
'-,
..•...
~i,!,'f10i
~;Q'1C;i
'~'(q41Cjlict~i
-
. ':~'
.0di:(i'1i<:f
.:
....
{:
.. :
"
90 .. THE
.. -".'
.~~~ht.~1
....... . .
->.
. :. Thisist~e'mos\P[\
,,:....
'"
the.. Passive de~iCisttiE '. ... , .. ..
.
,"
PRAGMATI({PlmCTI()N :OF••.•~>·
1
_.
"
".',
.T~EPhAGMAtrcE0·"l¢JI
··'·L······· "
.~:.
,-,--'~";.,.'..;..::..,:-,-",:,.,-'",,'.,....~:
"
.
'""
,. ",
1
the active type of [Priyamwada - Dear sakuntala, Just stay there only for a moment.
1 friends, void
of their
Priyamwada - For, with you near, this kesara-tree appears as though posessed of a creeper!
ima, which has taken ~ta.
;::r ~
What for?
sakuntala
sakuntala
?
Hence, indeed, you are called Priyamwada.]
(iv) Another example is from Uttara-Ramacharitam The talk is between
Rama and Sita - a husband and a wife, where Rama.consoles Sita, Who is uneasy because .her father has left. :
rrfur
'WI:
I
.~~,
RP «11<Sj 1'1 f.1 ('Q «i
I
T'i'T
;::r ~1
Rp:il W'"R'"lI1, I
,4 Ict ;""Fl q 'li ~ fd
~. i;
<.fTctT . '-'11'11 f''i ~,
'-'11'11 fli I ~ ,HI q 'li IRu 11 ~'-'1 OJ R1 >l
m"II
~I
t you attend to your
'WI:
. Qq~ct\'l, I
1fif fg
(ii'wFif'c0c;: ~
ih:
~
'(iq\'I'lI'1{U,q m'llIRlki 'l··m-qul: I
[RamS. C Devi Vaidehi, Please be calm f They are our respected elders and are not capable of leaving us. The agnihotri gentiles experience many difficulties and the
thousand arms like'
performance of the daily rituals shackles their free.dom. Sita
sand:'arms ?
- I know, My Lord, I Know it. But separation from. the relatives causes miseries.
Rama - It is true. People, therefore, having relinquished their desire leave you only wr,en
and having been repulsed by things mundane which peers the heart get respite in the forest.]
The talk is between
These dialogues show that the situations.
active is used in informal
The Passive: '-.~
. ",.
'.•" Thisistlle'mostpreferred paGkaging variant onh~.crissical Sanskrit.' the PasSive depiCi$the:(ormalerivirorirnenf. Ifi~.inbrefrequent[y used in .'. .. . . . . .
",:.'
"
':
l
·.T:H~
PRAGMA1"ICFVN¢T'laNoF,;.:, . 97...... ':"
~---'--
. . . . . . . . ._........... GIIiIiIIIiiiOi.:1
..
.
'- ..
... '
.' -.,
..:.:"
>'
When both the spea
the formal context than in the informal one.The Classical Sanskrit language is used more frequently in Royal conferences than in casual talk. The utterances are passivized to suit the formal surroundings. Sanskrit had not rem.ained a spoken language. It had become a language of royal conferences and scholastic debates. The classical literature has characters of higher levels. The audience of the plays as well as the readers of the Mahakavyas also belonged to the upper levej of the society. The Characters of some of the plays of Sanskrit literature are listed in the Appendix. The list includes the works of Bhasa, Kalidasa, SQdraka and BhavabhOli. This list shows that the characters belonged to the upper social level or to the lower social level. The middle class was not at all represented. . The heroes of the plays are the king, the queens, the princes, the princesses or a minister or a brahmin. There are other characters of lower level as doorkeeper ( !>lRi!5({1 ) chamberlain ( (",.-qq,~(4 ) charioteer (¥ )servants and maids, to serve the heroes of the upper level. The story element also belonged to the royal court happenings. Even in M(cchakatikam whose hero is a poor brahmin and who is loved by a courtesan, a simultaneous story of the royal happenings is created so that the interest of the people may not decrease. Moreover, the male characters are more than the female characters. The males from the lower level speak·Prakrit, and the ladies' from any class us'e prakrit. Sanskrit is not used as a spoken language but it is used for royal court proceedings· and in formal surroundings. The Passive suits the formal surroundings better than the Active. The Passive is the most preferred packaging variant of the classical Sanskrit literature.
when the surrounding is illustrations : (1) In the one act pI;
I, \
salya is interesting. Bot
-
1Jf:
- ~ I
~~
- ~it>UT
q;ut
- rr ~ I
'.
,I !
" 31.{Q;'Lf;
'f"fuq ({.t!i
I
rI
[salya
o
Kall)a
By whOrl
salya
By Indra
Karl)a
Not at al
As has been seen the passive is used in the formal situations. Sanskrit literature is full of formal situations. Most of the dramatic persons belong to the Royal courts. So, the Passive is more natural than the active. The formal situation is formed on two grounds (1) It depends upon the participants, their social status and their role in the utterance and (2) The circumstances under which the utterance has taken place.
King 0
gratified I in innum destroys' hard by I
i
Both Kan (ii)
The Passivization :
m ~
~~
The follow
The talk is between
DUI
and sakuni:the King's
I
The Social status & the role at the participants : . The social status of the speaker or the listener plays an importantrole in the packaging of iniormation. Following are the .situations where the passive takes place".· '.' '.. . .... . . . . . ..... ::", '.-,'
98'
.
- 3W
, ,::.
THE PRAGMATic FuNcTION OE ....
THE PRAGMATIC FUNCi
;ical Sanskrit language
When both the speaker qnd the listener have higher social status &
in casual talk. The
when the surrounding is formal the Passive takes place. Following are the
In
Jndings.
illustrations :
lad become a language
(1) In the one act play of KarQabharam, the talk between KarQa and
:Iassical literature has
salya is interesting. Both of them have exalted position.
; as well as the readers
m ~~,
leJ of the society. The tu re are listed in the
~l(rl.<:
-
g;11t
- ~ I
:alidasa, SOdraka and
~l(rl.<:
-
q;uf:
- -;or ~ I ~TSll:' 'l'flfT ~ I
ged to the upper social ; not at all represented. Jrinces, the princesses
r
,,
o
[salya
he story element also ~(cchakatikam
whose
esan, a simultaneous interest of the people
~~
¥
"3F·TCP<-T~H~('mft.Tit f&~: ~uf?;'n-"~ ·CiT,'[ct~m>;'ffil -,:p:rr ~ ~ 1:fl'l)~m.:r;'1: II"
:ters of lower level as lrioteer (¥ )servants
~ ~ ~
King of the Angas, you are indeed cheated;
KarQa
- By whom ?
salya
- By Indra
KarQa
more than the female )rakrit, 'and the fadies l
Not at all, Indra is cheated by me because I have indeed gratified Indra who is propitiated by the Brahmins with offering in innumerable ·sacrifices. Who is friend to Arjuna, who
s a spoken language
destroys the hosts of demons and whose fingers have become
nal surroundings. The
hard by patting the celestial elephant.J
Ie Active. The Passive cal Sanskrit literature.
Both KarQa and salya are the kings of some provinces.
\al siiUations. Sanskrit
The following dialogue is from the play DOtagha\otkacham. (ii) The talk is between Duryodhana the King, DUQsasana- the King's brother
natic persons belong
and sakuni-the King's maternal uncle.
II than the active. The
~~.
';;'1'''''.''
, upon the participants,
-
Cl('{1
~: ~rn:r.1
!
.<mITo~
:2) The circumstances
RmoT
~
~ ~ I'I'
lays an important role
3O+JMctloW C\
'q
~ l=I1'T{lCi<"l{4 . C\ .,~
,
.situations where the
I ATIC FUNCTION OF.....
THE PRAGMATIC FUNCTION OF;.:..
99
'.-.:
(i~
qIO"§;'tj,iil
~
~~iiI cil '1IS1iR1
Rlf"q lfu~
,
". ~~
!
~mj(f~VH61\ilil.s~
\
I
m~'Cf "'FH II" 'If) "'1 q i1 '11 <; {'JOU f'i '(-U I15
~floi;~ffi'
'fi1T ~
i~ H1I'~11 M Mil r+"1 c{h>~
-.
!
[ (King - Is this kr
:-
Ji'1,(<:14j ~.rrc;'lfi'{ II
~.
tI
Here, the King ani
'f
The second situati
I
'MJW ~~WPT "
Yaugandharayal)a
person who belongs te that the high personm
~ *i~'1IS1R1ti ~ lHi: II
that they use passive
[Duryodhan<\ - Dear DUQsasana
out of such formal
By Abhimanyu's death, our enmity is firmly established,
(i)
victory is attained and our enemies have been dispersed
In the first ac!
'J:if, 'i'( li 'i'11
in panic. Kri$l)a's pride is up rooted; and I have to day won both success and fame.
[(Ghariotear, v..
Oh ! to be sure.
Dul)sasana
SUI
This line is not spo~
The Pal)davas were engaged by Jayadratha's forces
and also spoken to only,
overcoming the forces at enemy, when Subhadr.a's son
so.
- second Arjuna - was slain by the discharging of a .
00
'. hundred·shafts. We, who through Bhi$ma's fall suffered many calamities have today, in this battle, planted sharp darts of sorrow into their hearts by killing their son.
Similarly, in Pre <:fl'\:-3ft ~
;::rp:[1plT~
, [It was while we Jayadratha displayed very high valour on the battle-
sakuni
If>
ceremony of the fathE
field today, beyond the expectations of the kings; for in the fight he forcibly robbed them at once of their
This is a casual t used.
son and their unequalled fame.) This dialogue has taken place in the midst of the battle-field after the
The passive cons
death of Abhimanyu. All the three participants have higher social status,
i.e. the person about v.. social status. The thire
otherwise the context is not a formal one . . '.' (iii) In the last
~ct of theplay Swapna~th~ talk between the kingUdaYana
and his Minister Yauganclharayal)a·js tci.be:i;E?eriWhenthes~$pense of Vasavadattais disclosed,
... .
t)1~:King .i;lSks~.· .- .
;.
........
.'
-,',.', . ..... .
.'
-'<:"" ~ .... '.';.
",
.'"
. (i). In: the sixth a' Dasaratha,he says·: .. -'- ..... ..
..... ....
some bf the example
'
" . -::., '.. ,"
-
~ ~l'f1JC!ill
-
{
'1 , ~
I
ffi(fll
I
ffi(fll,
[ (King - Is this known by Rumarwana ? ·YaugandharayaQa - Lord, it is known by all.) ) Here, the King and YaugandharayaQa have higher social status. The second situation is where the speaker uses the passive with the person who belongs to the lower level, in the informal situations. It seems that the high personnels are so much habituated with the formal speech that they use passive only because of their habit, even though they are out of such formal surroundings. , is firmly established, (i)
; have been dispersed
In the first act of sakuntalam, Du:;;yanta says to his charioteer.
~,
ed; and I have to day
'i{"I
1'1 1 ~>To-r
I
[(Chariotear, we have been drawn far by this antelope)). This line is not spoken in a royal conference but in the interior of the forest . Jayadratha's forces
and also spoken to only a charioteer, but because of the habit, Du:;;yanta speaks
vhen Subhadra's son
so.
:he discharging' of a
(iQ
Similarly, in Pratima. When Rama shows the place to Sita, he says :
-. 3hi:;;ma's-fall suffered battle, planted sharp by killing .their son. 'alour on the battle·
ms
of the"kings; for
Ul1;-3:r;r 3H"'Ilr"1:
"1ll1'fll~ · [It was while we were sitting here thinking of the performance of the ceremony of the father, that the 'Golden sides' deer was seen.) This is a casual talk between a husband and a wife, yet passive is
em at once of their
used. battle-field after the
The passive construction is found to be used when the third person
ligher social status
i.e. the person about whom the conversation is going on, is having a higher
.
'
3n t~e king UdaYana 9n the suspense of
social status. The third person is looked upon w,ith respect. Following are some of the examples.: ',."
· (i). In the s.ixth act • '1
.'
. '
ofPratrm~.WhenSuman·tra fells Bharata about ..'
•..•.
: •• '
0
-
•
• • • • • •
,oa.s aratha, he s a y s - : . . . ' :.' '.
;
••
'"'"""'0' 0,,,; . .1 .. ,,;,, "AGM'''i '",or,"~.,~;"..;,;· .." .
_~_
. _ _ __ ._.~'v _n';
- ..
0_ _ . ,
-'.-
-.,'~:'
0·.· .'-:
,
';I,
q;c;r~T
Though Arjuna is a I
q {
respect and was talkec
- I{I'll'1 ~'<Ti!
mfu
~RuT ~q,-,!'q~ ~ -q-~:M:ID ~d'1i11 ~ I
l
[Sumantra - [Prince, Please listen, Formerly, a sageboy who was the eye of an eyeless great sage, was killed by the great king
(iv)
Similarly, ir
are talking about Bhari normally expected in tl
gone out a hunting with an arrow hitting the mark following
-l'ffi-;f
its sound throygh the mistake that it was a wild elephant, it (the mistake) being caused by the sound resembling that
>lRi'1Ill
he
of a wild elephant, as
1Ffl1TJ
(the sage boy) was filling a pot
r
(with water) in a certain lake].
(ii) In \he first act of Swapna. when Brahmachari comes to the hermitage and describes what has happened in LawalJaka and tells him how the king behaved on hearing the death of Vasavadatta and
r
YaugandharayalJa. He says~ til 'q 1{\
- em:
Hft.T~TCFT:
u;rTT
~
[Brahmachari
.cnftr:"
er~ ~TT~T
muTT<J:
ll-F'c.TT
'1kR
- ~
~
-~
'1kR
-
~
-~,
~
c
'l11
~ ~ ~
eT<'TT:
qf{C'4'\t'
~R-T
I,
-
~
,
~+m:"
~
The king having returned from the hunting trip on
,l
, hearing the news of the death of boih wanted to
1
immolate himself but was, prevented by the ministers
-~!.
[Vijaya
from doing so' with great difficulty.]
Frien Bhar; head
, The Brahmachari is full of awe and respect for the king so whatever
Hom
he speaks for him he uses passive only.
Nandinika
- Frier
the time of the battle of Kuruk!;>etra. When his son Abhimanyu has been .
Vijaya
- How
killed by the Kauravas, a servant is sent to know how Arjuna is influenced
Nandinika- How at hi
(iii) Another example is of Arjuna, who was not having high post at
by that event. A servant Bhaia informs them in the following sentence in the play Dotaghatoikacham. 'l1G: - "'l'f~I'<1lRiR"i'ih ~
T-f, ~~~
Vijaya
qf{f(j'i'lj
and
Zi1'1I~'1lq>1\f.(4~'1 1'lR1~I
brot , , The .' '. her.
[Retuming afterhe was ehticed away bytheSamsaptakahords, Arjuna " put his dead son in his lap and wetted hirnwith his tears, bu"tbeihg reproved . . . '.
,"
, by Kri!;>lJa he madea v o w ] . ' "
"
..
.
. :--, ",
- Whc
,,"
,":'
...•
Of
~~ mfu 'l>R~T
Though Arjuna is a mere warrior he was looked upon with tremendous'
'R"'m~~'l'
Ri:IT itfurr:
respect and was talked of in passive to show that respect.
I
(iv)
Similarly, in the fourth act of Pratima. When two maid servants
sageboy who was the
are talking about Bharata and KaikeyT they use passive; Passive is not
killed by the great king
normally expected in their casual talk.
ting the mark following
mm
it was a wild elephant, . boy) was filling a pot
~Rll1l~i ~
f!
sound resembling that
~
r
'fr:.
- lic'!T '1~R~ 'l'fUT 'l'fUT ! :o:rq <6\{1041 ~ ~ 3M1:
~ 'l1
'lft: (!'f &R- fum I
'1RR'li1
- ~ ¢-5~ 'l1
mm
- ~ <;!'l1l{UI fcp
'iRR'li1
- fcp '<'1fbld+'l, ? ::ilq611~
mm
-
31"i
'q .
!
lachari comes to the iwaQaka and tells him )f Vasavadalla and
,i
t-
;mit
'l1fUrnT
?
::il
<;!'4<'41i"i'11 ~i4l1l~<e"l, I ~-5ftr ~~T llfl1d"l, I
~ ~ I 'IT'fCi;"
:m~f ~Fc.TT rT~Ti': 'Tl1: q f{<'4'W 'Ii I"f1 -51ffiit
..,.-RR-iliT . - ~ ~
mfurr
I ~~ ~ ~HlO'i'1 Mdcnq;1
rrn:
'§"I'!lT: I n the hunting trip on
-~!.~ 'lil:.~ I '1RR~, ,
:h of boih wanted to [Vijaya
mted by the ministers :ulty.]
'WT'ti"
~ 't.~l:f[q:! .
- Friend Nandinika, tell, me,. tell me. It is said that prince Bharata was seen to day by all the ladies of the harem headed by Kausalya, when they had been to see the Statue
the king so whatever
: havin'ghigh post at ~bhimanyu has been
, Arjuna is influenced
House. I, am unfortunate creature, remained at the door. Nandinika
- Friend, prince Bharata was seen by us with eagerness.
Vijaya
- How was the queen add'ressed by the prince ?
Nandinika
- How addressed ? The prince did not wish even to look
I
L
allowing sentence in
at her. Vijaya
- What a great calamity? By her, covetous of the kingdom .and making Rama deprived of the realm, widow-hood WaS brought upon herself;' even the people were led to ruin.
3.ptaka.. hords, Arjuna
. The queen is indeed cruel. A sin has been committed by ". her.
), butbeing reproved
-'\: . .:- .:.>.~ -'. p9 FUNCTION
"
of..;:.
. .._------- ... -.-.... _
,-:"
_._.- .....
'"
. .':' "< "
.,
. Nandinika
- Friend, listen leaving aside the consecration arranged by
(ii) Following is an
the subject, the prince went away to Rama's penance grove.
play when A$\avakra c(
Vijaya
(Sorrowfully) Hum !Thus went the prince! Nandinika, come
Rama. 3lI:G~:
on; we will see the Queen.] This discourse is going on between two maid servants. Here active
[A$\avakra - Bha~ has I
and the prince, and that is why the passive is employed. Another pragmatic function of the passive is 'conveying a message'.
her:
Messages are always being driven by some third person and they are mostly
The message is fOI
carried for the persons who have usually higher- social status. They are in the passive type of construction. Following are some of the
concerns to Rarna.
examples: (i)
¢ ,. "Tf'".-
could have taken place, but it is· about KaikeyT and Bharata, the queen
deliv~red
-
(iii) Immediately It
In the well-known drama -of sakuntalam when Kaova sends his
daughtersankuntala to DU$yanta he sends some message to him with his two disciples - N>'ih11iQ4m ~ I
mTI
-~~W: -
. [Mtava,kra - Anc ha~
~ '4'14i~~i ~ 'r~ 'Wli'j,Q4i«l
¥
pre
......... .
ent witl
d\'C;C;if.'l+1I4;;JRii'li j;jfct'Jiilcti ~'11"q,oii~m I. [King
What does his holiness command ?
sarogarava
That by niutual agreement you married the daughter of mine ... that ("our action) has been approved of by me who love you both.Why ? ............ ..
This is a persona conveyed or not-they ~ therein, and hence, (iv) Another exar there must be some rr and he carries the n
Therefore, let her who is expecting a child, be received to the jOint discharge of religious duties.] Here, the message is conveyed.tothe king,and.the message is of the sage Kaova. It was acusto:m th~t ines~ag~swere cQRveyed in formal
'.'
tone, and the passiveisagbdd iTiediiJii, to convey the same . ....... ,:;~<...... : .. . ':.<
.-------.. -------~---
.
_
.. .;'-':"
onsecration' arranged by
(ii) Following is an example from Uttararama. In the first act of the
o Rama's penance grove.
play when A$\avakra conveys the message of ArundhatT and others to
prince! Nandinika, come
Rama. ~ L
~T:
Hf';-",z
t
d servants. Here active
'q WICl('41
;c.ft"M; ~TR'!m 'q ~~ q; fl'" i' 'l'n.T{-~H-~n:
3Ri;q('4T.
W-5 Cl"~ lPi f':l ~ I "'"1 i'i fl:l (1 &l
.1
~nd Bharata, the queen ~mployed.
~ I
'[A$\avakra - Bhagavati ArundhatT, dowager Queen mothers and santa has repeatedly conveyed a massage that whatever be
'conveying a message'.
her ~ desires should be promptly fulfilled.]
rson and they are mostly
The message is for all and not for a particular person though it mostly
social status. They are
concerns to Rama.
lowing are some of the
(iii) Immediately thereafter A$\avakra conveys a message to Sita. when KalJva sends his
.. ~ 1:f<m
nessage to him with his
'11 '11 e1l R1 I
'q
$m:
W-G"C 1GQ -\.~ ituT..
cmI,
'lid] ~J I itffi
~o ~ wr"@'i
(1"i';(,!olfct1~JI'lIliiSljJf
'q
sr~~ ~ I
. [A$tavakra - And brother-in:law 8u$y.asrnga has conveyed that you have not been called as y6u are in the last stage' of pregnancy. Even Ramabhadra has' been kept there to entertaim you and we wish to see yot,! a longlived one with a son in your lap.] land? . This is a personal message to Sita. Good wishes conveyed-whether J
marriE!'Cl the daughter
conveyed or not~they are there. There is neither any formality nor officialdom
, .s been approved ofby
therein, and hence, it is relayed in active.
?. ..............
(iv) Another example is from DOtavakyam. The title itself suggests that
e received to the joint'
there must be some message to convey. Here, Lord KrishlJa is the messanger and he carries the message of Yudhi$\hira to Duryodhana.
mdthe mei>sageis of ,re conveyed in formal
~ .. ~'.~. ~ffit~ ~ ,!,~I0'H1l14
)
r
~
_'. feiili q<1f:n 'if{j«3I{1C;<1: qI "Sq (~
ey the same. ..... "
'q
.....
'.,
>, .
_~ . . . _. n__ ~.. .:n_~_ifC\);,I"{jFi
THE
.·~,:t~~;,;":J:;" ", .
PRAGMiTICFuf:.lc.ribNOF ...... . -,"
".'<:.. .
105: ' ..
:
,':~-'" ~
~:.
:
II
,"
.
.",
[Vasudeva
Yudhi!?tira and the PaQdavas after inquiring about your welfare regarding your person and your kingdom convey 'q
that they have experienced great miseries and their
ClI{NC;"ct'
~ fil";('h<:'
period (of exile) is over. (Please, therefore,) give unto us whatever share is due to us in accordance with law.]
[Dhatri - The queen Mahasena
This is totally an official message from ?ne sovereign to another and
palaka.Yol
it is also carried in an official rr:anner. 11 is spoken in a royal conference.
without the
So the passive is in a keeping with the occasion. The whole conversation'
you, under
is going on in a highly formal manner.
account of (v) Another example is from Swapna. In the Last act of the play. the
performing
message of Mahasena is being brought to Udayana when he regained his
a portraa 0
lost kingdom.
the marria! get peace
The dialogue is :
The circumstance
- N>lilil1lq4M ligH~'1: - ~ cil:{q (lI'i
.m
<wnJ 11-51:£j"~TWT
"f1:
!'I (iq l;:fl ct ~ Rl I
¥
important to decide the
I
circumstances.
err '1il'(\l~'1> ~ I
If two unknown per
~ ft; ~sfu 'Illl'(\l~~cl .~·II
fon~al situation is creal
[Kin·g -What Mahasena commands?
. putto use for the pUrpOSE from classical Sanskril
Chamberlain - Fortunately you have regained the kingdom which was userped by others because those who are
In the first act of
cowards and weak have no zeal. Usually wealth of the
s;
introduction, she uses
kingdClnl is enjoyed only by those who have zest.] (vi) Again, the message of his (Mahasena's) Queen is also interesting.
'-
She reminds Udayana the whole episode of his marriage to Vasavadattaher daughter, and sends a picture of hers and conveys good wishes to
[The confidence c
obtain mental peace after her death. So the whole episode is described
to speak- which royal
in passive and lastly good wis.hes which is informal and pregnant with
country has its popula,
maternal instinct is convE3yed in Active;. -
qp;ft-
-
reason has yourself, th(
~ ~-' ~ C(1<;IClC;"ct11 "Il1 cIT litm~+("T:Q"l-i+ff\n;rcrT o-TFmiful '
106 -.
THE- PRAGMATIC
..
~
of
a visit to the p.ena!
.
, THE PRAGMATICFUN~'
FUNCTION OF.,:" •. .,","
:
.~ .. '
"."-:-
.
!r inquiring about your
q<1~f+i'\1'i,,""1fl:l<jl'1l<jl<1: I ~'"I[1'"1{11~,* qiGII64q~~R G'\1T I
I your kingdom convey
~~'€lq0i11l10Pi4<1fcJqle;%.IM 1;fCf lTi1: I ~ ~
at miseries and their
'q q@l <;'\1 III ~'q !;i
therefore,) give unto
1ft <['I'd
fi'j "I Cf)M iii I IlI'1lfCite;q
~ fi'j"lCf)0'll1 ocr ~~t ~ I
accordance with law.]
'«IT
~~.;q
(fq"
fucmiT Rt
I
'li4" I
[Dhatri - The queen conveys-Vasavadatta is no more. To me and to
ireign to another and
Mahasena you are as dear a son-in-law as Gopalaka and
1 a royal conference.
Palaka. You were brought to Ujjain for that reason and even
l
whole conversation'
without the presence of fire Vasavadatta was entrusted to you, under the guise of giving her lesson in ViQa playing. On
i
account of your fickle-minded ness you went away without
st act of the play the
performing the marriage ceremony and thereafter we (two) got
vhen he regained his
a portrait of yourself andVasavadatta painted and ce.lebrated the marriage. I am sending you that canvas, looking at which get peace of mind.]
r
The circumstance under which the utterance takes place is also
!,
important to decide the type of construction. Following are some of the circumstances.
If two unknown persons come face to' face for the first time,.a highly formal situation is created. In such situations the Passive construction is i
putto use for the purpose oi introduction. Following are some of the examples
1.
1e kingdom
from classical Sanskrit.
ause those who are In the first act of sakuntalam, where Anasuya asks DU$yanta for his
Jsually wealth of the
introduction, she uses the following words :
:e who have zest.]
~ -
n is also interesting. ~ge
~ 'l1'i'(iMlq"1Pictl ~
+rt
'1<';\<\(\
-q~TI0MW<\il, . ~
to Vasavadatta-
ays good wishes to
'0>1'li I {(H10j'q
(lQ1 q'"l'I'1'"1 q[{'>l'i f41(+l I 4<;1 q 410:1
pisode is described
(The confidence created by your honour's sweet words prompts me
and pregnant with
to speak- which royal dynasty has .been adorned by yourself. ? Which country has its populacepi~ing through separation (from you) ? For what
'1iOml'"lBT
\r,hn
reason has yourself, though extremely delicate,been subjected to the fatigue of a vi~it to the p.enance-grove?] .
~~ft
"fFfTiTf'cr I
.
'ICFUNCTION OF." .. .,'."
... ~.
:
..
THE PRAGMATIC. FUNCTION OF:·.... . 107
(i)
[Manager-Noble lady
In the first act of Swapna. Yaugandharayaoa asks Brahmachari,
of learned men. Today,
an unknown new-comer, he says~-m
¥
W
sakuntalam by name, th
;;:{(lI+=4d, qq ~, qq 3TIU'
Kalidasa. Let, therefore,
[0' from where you are coming? Where you are going to ? Which is'
Actress: By reason c
your residence ?]
representation nothing a (ii) The SOtradhara c
(iii) Similarly, in the second act of Uttararama. Vanadevata asks Atreyee :
4'1~q(1I:-3'!Tlf ~, ¥
tfiRt>IJIR1d ? ~ lllOlh ..ii· c; GsC!5I'(U4!,('
'll$lIGI\'l:\
~
[Lady Atreyee, where are you coming from? What is the purpose of (your) moving in the forest of DaQQaka ?]
(l
. [Let us enact UttaraR
Here, in all the three illustrations, Passive is used forthe sake of formality
the versatility of whose
alone, as addressees are unknown as far as their social status is concemed.
(iii) There is anothe Sotradhara and he is a
. The SOtradharas of Sanskrit dramas have also to face a formal situatien.
{1~\:m
The purpose of his dialogues is to introduce the theme, te welcome the
mm~
: -
~
audience, and to give a symbolic suggestion of the story element. While the SOtradhara addresses the heroine, what he speaks is meant fer the audience. The SOtradhara does not address a particular individual in the
[Aye, Aye! truth lov
auditorium butthe entJre audi.ence as a whole. F.orthe SGtradhara, the whole
have te pay attention't(
audience is a cellection of persons. None knews the other personally. He
and that which is purifyil
has to begin in an extremely formal way. The SGtradhara who oCcupies
after comprehending It
an exalted position is talking with the Nata or the Nat! who are of a lower
Thus, th,e SOtradh~
status and hence the active censtruction would be more in tune. But as
put in a formal situation t
he is on the stage, in the midst of unknown persons, the whole dialogue
Scholastic deb a
is in the passive constructien.
construction is found n
(i) As an iliustration, we might scan the following dialogue from Abhijnana
in prepounding a propo
sakuntalam.
The written records of ~Tcr1 CP-rftrTGTH
,
l:.T\);T<:Tc.H-f1 "TTf\.T~TFH Tt~ "':TcrFTP:'T'<-Tc.T "T "Tc.T "r"TTe
II I I,
'l"f'1ffi; - ;;:{"p:r ;;:{"f\.n; q~lfl:T15<3"T q~TPc;£.Pl I
3n:r
~ .1. '~''''''TftCmtim:
,!~mrmJI(1<114*'l3
f4il4fq
:~~J.;.
" >
,
to be found in the pas: the Agent is cjempted : constructions, "
......'.
ares~'meofthe:,e~~iT passi0~ type':9('
',-
,-.',
.'", . . :;.
"
':'. .
, . ' , ' . 108
th~ ge,~E
,,"
• ",.,' ," .•••.
.
,"
'~""
": '.:'.:.':.:'~);\::/.' ;, . • >.
, . •;-;, ••. ;:.- ,.-.
. .... ", -:.,~<::.~:::.- : -.: :.",' : ." '. .... ~:':~::~
·,;::THE ",
~
PRAGMATIC. l'u~F' ~-
,
Qa asks Brahmachari ,
f
l re going to ? Which is'
adevata asks Atreyee :
-;iT
<;u:S'l>i{U'l!,{'ClI{:
?
[Manager-Noble lady! This assembly is for the most part composed of learned men. Today, we have indeed to offer a new drama, Abhijnana sakuntalam by name, the plot of whose has been strung together by Kalidasa. Let, therefore, (your) effort be bestowed on every actor.
!I
Actress: By reason of your honour's having well-done (i.e.studied) the representation nothing at all will be wanting.] (ii) The SOtradhara of UttaraRamacharitam says
"
r
Ihat is the purpose of
§I(:llulfl1
d'ilt
[Let us enact UttaraRamacharitam which has been written by a brahmin, 'or the sake of formality
the versatility of whose tongue has awed Goddess SaraswatT.] ,
al status is concerned.
{iii) There is another drama within the play Uttararama, it also has a
face a formal situation.
SOtradhara and he is also, introducing in the same way.
eme, to welcome the
{~~\'m
story element. While
'liT 'liT
~~ !,{1-il('1{1: "{~lq'01iil:I[li "1'I<;I~lq'lRt
'l~<;'i{""1I~UT 'I'Nhq l<;ql'1ld CLlfl1Rl I
3aks is meant for the ~ular individual in the
[AYe, Aye! tn.)th loving God Prachetas orders the physical world 'you
SOtradhara, the whole !
-
have to pay attention'to that which we have created by our divine sight
other personally. He
and that which 'is purifying and which contains KaruQa and Ad bhOta rasas
Idhara who occupies
after'comprehending the majesticity of its inner form].
IT who are of a lower more in tune. But as
Thus, the SOtradhara of the Sanskrit dramas uses Passive as he is
:, the wholE{dialogue
put in a formal situationto introduce the drama written by some other person. Scholastic debates and Generic construction- The passive construction is found more useful for emphasizing a point by sastrakara
wing dialogue from
in propounding a proposition which the sastrakara propounds as his thesis. The written records of such sastras for the benefit of posterity is usually
31'-1" ~T(r! Cf1TWT<;"T<.'T
l' ;'T
to be found in the passive construction. Because, in such constructions,
;'Tc.T ;'T;'TTc
the Agent is demoted and sometimes deleted too. These are the generic
•.:i:rR; I
!i
",
.
constructions, tti~ genera:li~ati6ns applied to each arid el(erybody. Following ares~~e, ~f the'ex§.mp{es'tak~~irornthe traditional', sastras where the' pa$si~~type'~i,~~nstn;ctio~' ~secL', ,.' ", ' , " ' . '
-,"
is
: .. :... . .
"
,-.,
:~'.
<: . :-.
.:
". ',:~. ::.:. ,"':
TIC
FUNCTION
': -.
:~
-""
c',,'
.: ~ ..
;
OF.,L:)·,' ":'";.'.
"
.."
': . .,.'
...'. .. y
, ' ....ifi:.c.' ' ~-.....,.".' .S ._ .... _. ___ .~ ___ ., ________ ~_~"'_ _ _ _ _ _~~_
____'__
(iii) The Alankarasi
(i) NagojibhaHa of Paribha$endu sekhara, after paying homage to
Ii iva and Amba starts his book with the following words:
'1'i~1'(t\ qU
I'll -.:ll '1 tl ;q Ict> <: 0 I(1 ;;if ell 'tl R ct> I ;;;q 'j{ q I fl'l '11 t\ (1 ;;if ~ I q ct> '4 I ;q fu 'i; I R "l1"4 ellfftct>;qlR
~'llfUT
mR
R"l l61i ct>1<:w;j , '"
C>Q1&11'4~ I .
% f(;: ~1
mWT q{Oct> I {Cf> (14IM't
[ (In this work) are exiplained the metarules which in the works of the
>T~i{':IT"r-=rRrr'f<'4T~:r,
older grammarians were given as SOtras but are in this grammar of Panini's
mWTq~4i I {Cf> ;PM '1
(mostly) established by Jnapaka,s and Nyayas, provided they are contained
"{«\).''i;4 Cffil
in the Bha$ya and the Vartikas].
I
He does not say ~ ~'llfUT C>QIMII11"4lfli but he says
(ii)
mR
~1:!TftrT ~ C>QIMI'4rct I
I
In the same way, Pataiijali in Karakanhika says\
~ crn
fQ il ct
% f(; crnq;<:uT if ~ ~
'1 f(; I cp~ 'i i'<:ll 'i l;oj ~ I
~~: r.R~n: R!;;q<\i 'n!~
{~~m(1rM:1
WBT'1T
'1
~ ffi~
e:qf[fu,
'iClIQ1'1i
W:
1'1 (11 ct qC; I
~ 'f~'iIRe~
wfl(1qc;l~ ~W;1
~~rr.-
'1
-m
PcP~'f
~~m~~1 [What (could this statement) 'Karake' (be) ? (It is), the statement of Safijna :'technical designation'. .It is necessary to be stated ? No, (then), how can it be known; if it is not stated? For in this grammar statements are made by means of those words whose meanings are known from ordinary speech, or which are artificially made designations like Ii, ghu, gha or bha. But this (word Karaka) is neither a word whose meaning 'fixed point' etc., is known from speec;h, nor. indeed an artificially .- ordinary ' . made designation, because it has not been prescribed elsewhere . But.this . .is the section dealing withtechnical designations. Thisbein.g so, whatelse .. can be understood than such .qdesignation ?]
';io niE ,
- .. ---.--... ~--~-'---
-----.-
c
PRAGMATic
FUNCTIoN
OF.: ...:.
\
~
zrm4M f
[The gist of his. ow offering homage to Par forms. The ancient alai 'the implicit sense on p of the expressed sens ~FtI'lilRt>, 3:rr~{q-, C41"l{1 as enhancing the beau I fold mode of expressio sense to justify the pril justify the secondary ~
Mands: . One of the pragmat While discussing the p; should not be neglecte l Potential. This is a pel command or a mandai a few exceptions in n( construction is being E The Imperative ha the forms-i.e:the verb order and a request an< for ·the Directivesa[l( Issuing a mand in tt on the participants 1
as
Jaying homage to
(iii) The Alankarasarwaswam of Ruyyaka starts with following lines-
ing words:
'"1"H''fi'4 ~
~ 'i1lqiji;:qI£jf{~%;IR
PFJjIMiijiln~';1loli Cfi'4T dli<141j;'64il II , e
R
~
c;ql&:ll£j~ I
% ft; n~~~m>T"irr
:h in the works of the ; grammar of Panini's 3d they are contained
I
'C:IJTXI1 q {4> I {'Ii 'Ii ii'l ;:r "'«lf~i%;4 1:f{T~N:
\
~
r hika says-
i r
!til" C1ll (11 d q <; IW: ~ if f) "II fle '1>'1>{-
:~ ~TOGT ;:r
'(il ~
ClT'
f\:I . .
r;f n?f' f'",~~Cfl.f
i
I
l
,signation' .
? For in this grammar
,
£j'm<WT
GWt
filfll"i':ful't I "
~ ~ >lhlqIN
ft:
[The .gist of his own (self created) AlankarasQtra is being shown by offering homage to Pa rvatidevi (godess of leaming) who is trimunerate of forms. The ancient alankarikas like Bhamaha and Udbha\a have placed the implicit sense on par with- figures of speech as it adds to the charm of the expressed sense. Thus in figures such as q;q\41fui, 3i>l*@>l~im, W11{11fui, 3iT~f<1, "1FJI{
Mands: One of the pragmatic functions of the Sanskrit passive is issuing mands. While discussing the passive in Sanskrit, the Imperative and the Potential should not be neglected. The mands are conveyed through Imperative and Potential. This is a peculiarity of Sanskrit language where for issuing a command or a maildate, passive construction is used, where as barring a few exceptions in no other known or widely spoken languages, such construction is being employed.
meanings are known designations like Ii, VOId whose meaning indeed an artificially d elsewhere. But,this 5 being so, whatelse
I
1
The Imperative has only verbal form whereas the Potential has both the forms-i.e. the verbal and the participial. The Imperative conveys an order and a request and sometimes good wishes too. The Potential is used for the Directives q[1d the'suggestions. '.
~.
.
·.Issuing a mahd in the ACtive onhe Passive type of constr.uction depends· on the ,participa~tsas well as the circumstances under which it is uttered:,.
The role of the participants and their social status plays an important role in the selection of the Active or the Passive type of construction. A bird eye-view can be seen from the following diagram
Sr. No. Play
Sp
(1) Utlara Rama.
Ra
ACT I
Mands (2) Utlara Rama
Ra
ACT II
Imperative
Potential
/\ Verbal
Verbal
(4) sakuntalam
Directive
Goodwishes
Indirect Informal
Direct (2nd Pro Imperative).
Suggestions
Formal
(5) sakuntalam
'"
(3rd Pr. Imperative
Probalities
Wish
Passive
··1
Con dIt.lOna
Kin
,o.CT II
A /
Du
ACT I
/\
Orders
(3) sakuntalam
Participial
Kin
ACT II I·
Imperative
. (6)· Mrcchaka\ikam Vi\I ACT I 1
Mannerism
Request
Hypothetical
(7) Pratima
STt:
ACT I
The Imperative: The orders are given through the Imperative constructions. The orders are of two types-the direct and the indirect. The direct orders are given in the second person Imperatives while the indirect orders are given in the
(8) pratima
STt,
ACT IV
third persons of either active or passive. Following are the situations under which they are used :
The speaker, having to those having lower sl
The direct orders ; The direct oiaersare given iii
t~e2ficj
. If the speak~r has higher s6cial status ~nd thEi>iistener h~s a low,er .. ;\one, Active is but 'n~turaL Foliowing .are~ some.ci(the iUU~iratibns: ..:. ','
.:.
.
.
.
.:.:"
.
'
..
':.
.
'.
.. ,' .::.
"
-----'---_._--_.-. __
';:
..
-' ~'.
":' ... :.
using passive in format s . situations. ",
",
'.;"::
, plays an important e of construction. A
m
Active Utterance:
Sr. No. Play
Speaker
Listener
(1) Uttara Rama.
Rama
> Durmukha
ACT I
[Tell me what you learnt.]
(2) Uttara Rama
Rama
~,~ <'f~+r'Tll:-1l"f iT ~ u;;n '1J'1' {1 '1hn Iq 'l ~ I
> Durmukha
ACT II
[Durmukha tell Laxmal)a, your new King Rama orders you.] (3) sakuntalam
.rticipial
ACT I
[Charioteer Drive on horses]
(4) sakuntalam
uggestions
ACT II
~'lll'l: I
¥,
DU$yanta > Charioteer
King
~,
> VidOsaka
.
fir
mq~W
it
q'<[;
[Friend stay, My say has something more.]
(5) sakuntalam. . ACT II
I;onditional
R4PI'1'{l«i ¥ I
[Raivataka you too occupy your post] > VasantasElna q'8'i'ifl~,
(6) M[cchilkatikam Vita
le.rism
~, ~ ~
> Servant
King.
[Vasantasena, stand stand)
ACT I
I Hypotheticai
(7) Pratima
fir
STta
'F
"ff'l'i;"
> Maid
I ~ P14Ict'l
[A sin has committed Go, return
ACT I
it.] 'ructions. The'orders (8) Pratima
lct orders nr~ given
~ '1m, 'll1\i'1'11{
> Bharata
STta
ACT IV
ders are given in the
[Come my boy, fulfil your brothers desire.]
the situations under
The speaker, having higher social status use Active when he orders to those having lower status. But Sometimes it seems that the habit of using passive in formal situations is many times reflected .in other informal )f .the Activ~ type.
li~tener
. situations. .. .. ~
has a lower
,.,
;'.,'
",
,':
Ie iliu$tratibns·:· . " -.-: .. -'"
."'
.
..
.
-.' ..:
.'\
.
", " ",
J.lC ,FUNCTIO NO~.\,>:.
. -::
-.
-,"
-.'
': ,"
....
,:;-.
.-~.
'
:::.:. ,'-'
' .-- .. ---~---------, -
....
~
...
--
.-~.
~-'.,
:-
.
-
------- ---
Sr. No. Play
Speaker
Listener
Passive Utterance:
(1 ) sakuntalam
King
> Charioteer
¥,
ACT I
"
r
having higher one uses F
[Charioteer, you by the time I
Pial
I
(1 ) Pratima.
De~
I,
horses have their backs
f
rendered wet].
t
ACT III
,
I
[Raivataka let the general be
ACT II
\,
summoned.]
(3) Pratima
Sr. No.
inmates of hermitage let the
~, fl'1IQ\'d@<'1&I['4\1I,!
> SeNant
t I
come back having visited the
King
Rama
I .
wt~· ~TOG'
> SeNant
[Soon, please ascertain (what)
ACT I
(2) Swapna
the clamour (is about).] (4) Pratima
0
a mark of respect. Thus, a
&"
~:'I
(2) sakuntalam
When a servant like Ka prince or princess or an
~"'j"jqlfu;j ~~~.
~ ~TSf'I"G01:
----------
Bharata
> Devakulika
Actl
~I q5@Q&';('1
(3) UttaraRiima
La~
Actl
[Please tell me, who His Honour
ACT III
Kill
herS' is.] . (5) Pratimii
B.harata
> Sumantra
~~q5\l1fu ?~~
1l~'4\11 '! I
ACT III
(4) UttaraRiima
['Consecration' you say ? Let
Viii
Act III
it be offered to her Ladyship here.]
(6) Swapna
King
> Doorkeeper
ACT VI
i
I
L
[Let Padmavati be summoned]
The Indirect Orders: The indirect orders can also be seen as requests. They are always given in the third person.
(5) l.!ttaraRama
The passive is used in formal situations whereas in informal situations,·.
Vii
Act III .
the .active is used. In ihese constructions,genera:llythe listener has a higher .. social status than the speaker, . ,. . 114
THE
P~AGMAtICFUNCTi(lN
OF: ... :
.PRAGMATIC FUNCTII. -'HIE ..
<.
,:.. " .
~.
.
"-'".'
! •.
,
~~~~~~~~~~~~--~~~-.----------
3
Utterance:
When a servant like KanchukTya, Pratihi'i ri or ChelT speaks to king, queen,
qqr~l'IqIRl;j ~~~_
('n
prince or princess or an official having high post, then he uses passive, as
&<:Gfi
,
: '1 teer, you by the time I
i
lack having visited the s of hermitage let the
a mark of respect. Thus, a p,erson having lower social status speaks to those having higher one uses Passive. Following are some of the examples: Sr. No.
Play
(1) Pratima.
Devakulika> Bharata
Listener
Speaker
~I~
~ ~ wt 'I'I
ACT III
; have their backs
·~~~I.
ld wet).
~ka
Active Utterance:
[Please Listen. It is reported that
r
let the general be
just when Prince Rama was
i.
being installed on the thrown by
ned.]
.r
f<1i~~ Jlease ascertain (what)
i
nour (is about).)
the Hon'ble King. your mother said,]
(2) Swapna
Kanchukiya
~ ~4dl't
[Oh ! What can be done ?)
Act I
:mit (p~
(3) UtlaraRama
tell me, who His Honour
m:
Act I
'q
I ~6"!&lild<'( I
a:r:t
'l11rfq; I
[Noble lady. Look; It is worthly to
lffir?
l
~ ~
{ I cration' you say ? Let
look at. This is Lord Bhargava.)
(4) UltaraRama
Vasanti
$r,~~I~
< Rama
~mm:q ~~
Act III
'fered to her Ladyship
Ji1c;lqtll'lq~14 4'1'1lq41 ~
l
q'illq~1 dlqC;I~4dl't I Imiivati be summoned)
~W:I [Lord Hurry up Hurry up Take care of the son of Sila at 'the banks of Godavf!ri near Silatirtha which is in the south of the
ts. They are always
Peak Jalayu. ] (5) UttaraRama
1 informal situations,
of: ... :
~,
< Rania
Act III
listener has a higher
TIC FUNCTION
Valmiki
l%
~ ~4J.!'N);(1~
, [Rama, what more should I do to , pl"ase you ? )
. :: ..
:Tt:iEPRAGMATIC FUNCTION OF.....
115
..--~
..----,---
.-,------,.'
,
",
- ..
_---
_ A _ _ _ . _ . _ . _ _ _ _ _ • _ _ _ ~._" _ _ _ _ _ · . _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~ •• _ _ _ _ •
Lak~malJa
(6) Utlara Ri'ima
< Rama
3ll
r
~
~'I
Act VII
[Noble Sir, let us look at the element of the play. ]
(7)
sakuntalam
Priest
< King
Act I
[If then, this be your question Let.
In above constructions, the Passive is effective as the listener has a higher social status than the speaker. Sometimes, in such situations, the Active is also used. The addressee is indirectly addressed in third person in the Active fype of construction. Following are some of the examples.
1.
Sr. No.
Play
UtlaraRama
Durmukha < Slta
Speaker
Listener
m-,
~~-"'fUit
.'
f<1;n I 4 <1 RI,
[Oevi, Prince Laxman requests you ' the Chariot is ready. Let
ACT IV
I
sambOka
UttaraRama
<' Rama
R
Pratima
9
ACT Vi
\
I
F
10 Pratima ACT V
r
11. sakuntalam
C
Act I
I I
I
her ladyship ascend it.'].
2.
S
Active Utterance:
~ W: I d<;I{1(\1 ~ I
Act I
Pratima
8
I
(it) be done thus.]
B
ACT III
\
Rt><1dl"l I
Pratima
7
I I
_ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _
I
12. sakuntalam
~~ ~ Id<;I'(l(\
Act I
I
[This side, My Lord, Let Pus' paka
Act II
be ascended.]
3.
UttaraRama
< Rama
Vasanti
Act III
m
dltl<;R1'i4[{!itl ~
W:
I
[Let His Lordship take a seat here.]
4·
Avadatika > ::'l1a
Pratima
ACT I 5
Thus, the direct or
~~I
indirect orders are giVE
[Queen, Please listen].
Pratima
or informal decides thE addressees are directly
> Citizens
Rama
officiality or formality·
ACT I . [o.Citizens!. Please listen, listen
.alloi you)." 6
Sudhakara > Bha\a
Pratima
....
ACT III . .,
[SeaMy· Lord). . ......... .
. :-",
~.",
';"
"
r
.
as the
Pa~sjve h;,pE!r : .'
"..'. "f~Wl;~J . '.',.'
:. ,~
passive). The actiVE) II
i
. Thelmperativ~i.s ..... -.~
:..
.
c~nveyedby eld~rly.;1 . '::.' '.: ;,. . . ~. ' ,
"' .
.".::.;'-' . :,..• ;.•.•.. ;.:.....
.-:~ :~", / . :.'.:' .;:.
•••
....~ >.,
:.:;iH~ ..: '
PRAGMATIC
.;'~{ i
.• ,:~. , "
FUt{~!
r
l
,Ie Sir, let us look at the
~ ~
7
I
en, this be your question Let.
8
9
I'i'
>tfu~R.! "f'1T" I
Sumantra > Bharata
Pratima
[Let the Prince enter.]. .
Pratima
RavaQa
3l<'i' ~ I ~ 'l1
> Rama
[Do not hesitate, You may ask me].
I
iome of the examples.
RavaQa
10 Pratima
t
ldressed in third person
m m ~~I'1f'iillR4'1:
> Ascetics
(jqf.w'1:
ACT V
~.,!.
~
. Janasthana, listen all of you listen'! ].
~~..,.,.rr Rt~14
(jiml$'!
I """""" .... '.6 ~ -;;. mRr: I
[0 ye ascetics residing in
Active Utterance:
. W: I
~
[Let the people follow me.].
ACT Vi
ve as the listener has ,es, in such situations,
ner
"It
> Citizens
ACT IV
le done thus.]
i
Bharata
ACT III
'~I
lent of the play. ]
Pratima
~ I
r
, Prince Laxman requests , the Chariot is ready. Let
"FIT:~I~~I
Charioteer < King
11. sakuntalam Act I
[The reins are held in. Let the long lived descend.]
adyship ascend it. '].
Anasuya
12. sakuntalam
f'1: $r Ict~l{l$,!'~ I
< King
Act I
"
;m<\" I 3lfur
.~
rTI~,hn ~rnm
side, My Lore!, Let Pus' paka
u;;rRr: I
Iscended.]
[May
II'lGI{1'14Ru(l ~ ~ I
influential royal sage, whose
-Us Lordship take a seat
family name was kaus 'ika.]
Your
Honour
hear.
Formerly, there was a highly
] ,
[~I
l
~
In, Please listen].
Thus, the direct orders are given in the second persons where as the indirect orders are given in the third persons. The situation whether formal or informal decides the type of construction-the Active or the Passive. The addressees are directly addressed in the second person, but to show respect, officiality or formality they are addressed in the third persons.(or in the
izens !Please listen, listen
passive). The ~ctive Imperative is used in the informal situations where
yoti);
as . the
.
;~I;
Pa~sjvelmper~tive:isused in. ".... .. :.-
the formal situations.
Thelmperati~~.js usedto'conveygoqd wishes too. The good wishes. ".'
My Lordj., ....
.... :
'··1
. conveyed ·by.elderly.:personsare knowncas biessihgs. ( 31T~TI: )
.:.
.co,,···
':.' ,"': .
~C.A~T" :~C- .F-U-N" ~'; ;.~-I~";'N"'·";'o:': '~;:,.:i-;,; L:~"~:",G~Anc>~;~'o, ..
-... ".
..
0'00
/....
m', ..... -.-
..
-.-.-~'-~
~;::.
Following are the examples of good wishes conveyed in informal tone :
All
(te
(i) . In the fourth act of sakuntalam the Tapasis are giving blessings
Rama
(t(
Sita
(t(
to sakuntala in the following words :
~~ n
\);;<1 l<11 -
~,~14i{i'iH*i'i'.l$ ",gi~ql~T01t ~.,
q'hsH4R!'11
m
~ I LaksmalJa
'l1
: (tl
(vi) UttaraRama,
t
¢1{k41 (to Lm of your husband's high esteem (of you)
[Kausalya : (te
Second
Child, may you give birth to a hero.
Third'
Darling, may you be highly thought of by (your) husband]
These good wi heart of the originator v the originator as well ;
(ii) HW: -<1'4i~\{q ~~ 'l41ii\~"'i1i 'l1
.. wi"
The good wishes \\ and sometimes in the
~ ~ #cr ~"'Cli9ft; "
(i)
[Kasyapa : Be highly thought of by your husband sarmistha (was) by
UttaraRama. J
Yayati. Obtain you also a son, (who would be), a universal monarch as she .
31telqSf):-~
(did) Puru.]
[Astavakra-Wt
(iii) Pratima, Act III
·"a hero !]"
¢1'H&'4I-:smr, "R{«i"i1iq'j 'l1
(ii) UttaraRama. J
~
[Kausalya - Child, be without any anguish]
[(Arundhafi & •
(iv) Pratima Act III
(iii) sakuntalam A,
Wrnr-:smr, '4"~mrrm 'l1
'IiT~W: (to sa~
[Sumitra : My son, become glorious ! ]
[Kasyapa : (to
(v) PratimaAct VII
mt . mt
-::~11'!","P:1i'3,
[All
mr
" -<11 i4'i~OI f-tlHhntl'l1
(toBharata)
"-41€l['{4Cl I
.. (Mothers to Rama, to LaksmalJelj"My s~h;
(v)
: '.; ".
""
118
UttaraRal Cli fCrtI <1>1
THEPRAG:MATIC FUNCTION OF:.,:":" ,",
':.:(' .
.
(to
[Valmiki •(to. SIt:
live i0l1g, "
.
sm
[Bhagirathi (to S
I"
,(to Bharata)
UttaraRal
~ (to
(tb SIta) . -~, ~{I'I:g:Ji
(to Bharata) .
(iv)
("l=fT(K:" to Rama, to LaksmalJa)-mi1", ~t1i1Cl I
.... :
.
....:'
.
. ;:' :~- .~.
THE PRAGMATIC FUNCl
lVeyed in infonnal tone :
,
isis are giving blessings ~I
I
All
{to Smi)-Dear girl, live long with an auspicious fortune!
t~.
Rama
(to Bharata). Hail, be long live!
STta
(to Bharata) May you live long as the companion of my Lord!
Lak$maoa : (tb Bharata) Be long lived.]
r
_(vi) UltaraRama, Act IV
I
3reat Queen' indicative
'f)'hiRlI (to Lava) -;mo, M;('i1lC1 I
,
[Kausalya : (to Lava) Be long lived ! ]
r
3ro.
I
1t of by (your) husband]
I
I
"
lnd sarmi$\ha (was) by versal monarch as she
J
These good wishes are informal and grown from the boltom of the heart of the originator without considering the social status or roles of both the originator as well as the receiver. Thegood wishes which are formal are conveyed in the Potential moo(i and sometimes in the Benedictive mood. (i)
UltaraRama. Act I
I
3l
I
[A$\avakra-What more can we hope than (you) be (a mother) of I
a hero
,
!]
i
(ii) UltaraRama. Act IV
t
I]
~
(to Lava) cpRllfbli ! 3l1'itSQ'ili mr I
[(ArundhatT & Janaka ; (to Lava) O'auspicious one be long lived !]
)-Zlffif,
:r :r
fiQ M1 q I
(iii) sakuntalam Act IV
l
Cf>T~<:[q; (to sakuntala) -~~ 4"41"1: ~ I
[Kasyapa : (to sakuntala)-May your path be anspicious !] (iv)
UltaraRama~
Act VII
~ (to STta) ~TRPl: I 31 Pc! C"1l <=1 I ~, {jqf({{f{$'(illfbl ~
[BhagTrathT (to STta). O'immortal child, (you be a thousand years (old)]
I
t=R!m mr I
(v)
[Valmiki(lo SHa). Daughter, be long lived it] this way!]
i) cMy soh, live iong. ".'..
mc
FUNCTION OF.....• "
UltaraRarna. Act. VII
"
..:,
"
.' . THE PRAGMATIC FUNCTION OF.....
.119
(iv) In the first act c
The Potential :
must not be a daughter
Unlike Imperative, the Potential has two types of constructions - verbal and participial. The verbal forms are used in the Active constructions whereas
mrr- wq
the participial are used in the Passive constructions. The verbal form denotes
[King - Can it be
directives in the form of wishes and hopes, probabilities and capabilities, or is also used in the hypothetical or the conditional constructions. The verbal forms of the Potential do not have importance of the Agent. Most of the forms are found in the third persons and not in the 1st or the 2nd persons. So, automatically the importance of the verb and the object had increased. This, and the structurally simplistic participial forms increased the use of the Potential passive Participles~ Moreover, the potential constructions do not have any specific Agent. So the social status does not affect. Most of the constructions are the Generic. So the 3rd person is more in usages.
';fT+1 <J:
of the Group, not belon i-
t f
The Potential moe Following are some of
0) In
the second ae
~- '>11<:;1«<$, ;;
(.
(Cheti : Princess (ii) In the fourth act <:>
, The Directives :'
he thinks the probabilit f
The Potential verbal form denotes :
¥ ':!
(i) wish (ii) capability & probability, and
3lH1'1'f,!!'ilifiMct ~
(iii) conditional or hypothetical situations.
~iflifl'il"l '\,HNiil6<:;<1;oj
ex~mples
Following are the
mrr,~, "
where wish is denoted.
, [ VidO$aka - W~
(i) I n the first act of Swapna, Kaiichu. sass :
WlfSll:ll iq"ii'll ;r
% «l44''i:illT11'il:1il,
, Latama'QQapa or to the
ctqf{:qg; 'f61S1ct+1 ctClf4I: "
been covered by tiger sf
(Chamberlain - The princess who loves dharma would never wish to put obstacles in the religious rituals of the ascetics because (dharma) is her family tradition.
or to the Saptachhada fe hillock which bears pai (iii)
(ii) In the fourth act of Swapna. Pad.mavatT hopes to be honoured by the King.
In the fOUl
mrr -
q'UI
~ 0lT61T
'fl'I'+i' '
[So that My Lordmay respect me on seeing this Wealth of flowers]
[King: Thip ne'wl\
does~otwantto t~lIthe .
, truth. !t is true that she
.
.""
"
.
mrr -~;'.~~,;r ~~ I~ ~I'
(iv)Vasavadatta Sl
[King : Dearjriend, I will' not tell. You are garrulousl. ".'
'.;
.
. "..'
-i·
~
.
'" ' .. :::.>" , , ; " " ' 0 , ' ..
',":.-
120
" timid.]
THE PRAGMATIC FUNCTION OF.•• :.
,5l,hac!.
','
. ':.'
,F ;:'' -''-----+--: THE PRAGMATIC FUNCT'
(iv) In the first act of sakuntalam, Dusyanta wishes that sakuntala must not be a daughter of the wife of Kal)Va of the same caste. He says,
constructions - verbal construciions whereas
"®IT-
1e verbal form denotes
3lftr
-;n+r
*~qil\):;q"lfl€io\~h-m:rm ~ I
[King - Can it be that this (girl) is sprung from a wife of the Lord
es and capabilities, or 1structions. The verbal ~ent. Most of the forms the 2nd persons. So, ~t had increased. This, 9ased the use of the I constructions do not lot affect. Most of the more in usages.
of the Group, not belonging to own class] The Potential mood is the best medium to show probabilities. Following are some of the examples: (i) In the. second act of Swapna, A Cheti asks PadmavatT :
~- 'i4~<;I\{il>, ~ "ff "®IT fcroqT ~ I (Cheti : Princess, if that King were to be ugly 7) (ii) In the fourth act of Swapna, when Vidusaka isin search of PadmavatT, he thinks the probabilities, where she might have gone.
Rl~<'lC/i: -
¥
~ ~ 1ffiT ~ 4<;J1.€idl I WII"losq 1ffiT ~ ~
3l1{i"11''
~~'(il{\m<;€i;j ~ ~,
:mm
fMtld l ;!,I4IY%iC/i{41'&i <;I'644d<6
llm~ I
. Jted.
. [ Vidusaka - Where must have queen PadmavatT gone, to the
Pi'! S( ii il ii i';:R1I :
· Latamao'c;lapa or to the rock named 'p.arvatatilaka' which appears to have
"
been covered by tiger skin on account olit being covered·by asana flowers,
lla would never wish ~s because (dharma)
or to the Saptachhada forest which emits a pungent smell, orto the wooden hillock which bears painting of deers and flowers 7 ]
lS
(iii)
to be honoured by
In the fourth act of Swapna. Udayana says-
"®IT - ~ 0!lBT "1 cil &;I ((I ~
.i
'.C!iT"i" 1is Wealth of flowers] I
r"
'.'
miS~Jabi~ on hearing the
timid.]
~I .
~ II
· truth.)t is tnje that she. is discerning, however,a l1l,dybYJlature is usually i
::.,
~ ~
~ ~ I
[King : This ne"wly weddeddamselwill feel
l.not want to tell the
Jrulous].
'¥IT
(iv) Vasavadatta sees the possibility to
be!5ee~'b/some
one in the
"".
· S\h.act.
'.
;.:, .
THE PRAGMATIC FUNCTION OF.....
121" . . . .. -.- .. _ - -
,
<11f1<1C;'dl-m ~ I
qil--SN 111
,
1:[~~ I ~JlfJ:ItSQlfJ:I I
~1~q~·1
[Vasavadatla : I have waited too long. Somebody might see me. Let me go.]
[King (to himself) our suiI' to the ladies
Again, in the act-V of Swapna-the possibility of Vasavadatta
(v)
to. be seen and thought is seen.
Let (it) be (so). I
~qq;:-~ .3Ri'AI<141"1i1i1'1 I ;::r, f,:{'fI"1<11
:m,
3c;q;'R1'1-
fi
The Potential moe
m ~ ~ ~.I
(i)
31m<:[ ~
"{BIT
-
Rt~Qq;:
_. ~ ~
~-f
~
{I""'i'M
:>1<1kHp;{)
;:n+f
m~{IT[f SlR\<1{4k1
-
(ii) Again in the ~-mT, W>"I4"1lct4c;j'
If it is an illusion then may such an illusion last a long
[King - Can this II
time. VidO$aka -
(iii) In the same;
You must have seen aYaksiQi named'Avantisundari'who lives in the royal family.]
(vi) in the first act of
5 akuiltalam, where
flp:i<1C;I-~,
W1
Dusyanta does not expose
his identity; he thinks-
-~
. \NTI ('1<1'1<1'1)
mq
I ~ I
1:f'i. ~
In the first. act of Uttararama, Rama sees the probabilities of
U"l'r:. - 4ct1IRt~c;1fC1ct'lifl1qlJl
ffi'Ii*'
'."
'"
i
I
I
-~
Soryavansi Kings.J; .".-
(iv) In the 6th E
i,
i
tkl11l1EF4l1 II "."
[Rama - Woe:oe' unto me, if on my score the. rumours wereto blot the pure ~haract~rwhich has been glorified by the"ir acts by the . .,. .
I
1
f
;:n+f
~,
m
[0 destiny !It w you had kept the,pr .
.~.,;,
(v) .'n the secol
Ul1-¥~.v
y.
.:,···[Rama (You) hE ofSrahmin might t
THE PRAGMATIC FUNCTION OF..... ·,
THE PRAGMATIC FUI
(viii) In thesec6n~·at::t 01 sakuntala, Dusyanta knows the capabilii . of VidOsaka. He say$~ 122
\
~ ~ "Ifbl+J, I
~~lftifT Ws<1c;;J\ «fI"ilc;ff
~ aFl41{ct~
sakuntala is as thol hers is in his accOl
\
1
bad rumours for himself. He says:
i
[Priyamvada-An
,
I
[King (to himself)..: But my royal character would be disclosed .. Well, I shall just speak thus-] (vii)
~ <MT
she also is towards
Oh! It is impossible. You might have seen her (Vasavadatta). in your dreams, on hearing about the . bath water.
King
1
1
[King~May it i
m.~~~1 [VidOsaka -
·In the first
-------:-----~.--
._---._.
r I,
q:
II fJ:t 6Q IfJ:t I
ody might see
<:Nlf (;(:qlIM!) ~o
me.
Let . ~
~ I ~ q~it'l
L ;sibility of Vasavadatla
! I
,
;w:r m~-rofI-
l'iRli.mfu
ght have seen her )nhearing about the
Let (it) be (so). I shall speak thus to him.] _The Potential mood also denotes hypothetical and conditional situations, (i)
rr~m.rl ¢
. [King (to himself) - The chap is indiscreet. Perchance he might report our suiI' to the ladies in the harem.
In the first act of $akuntalam, the King thinks.
':\ ~ <1m q 4 'i {"41~ q fJ:t4l1 Q( {'i I
u::m-fcf;
i
>;:jfu ~ I
[King-May it indeed, be that as we are (disposed) towards her, so
I
she also is towards us ?]
f
(ii) Again in the act III of sakuntalam, the king thinks : .
to
. u::m-(R1',
an illusion last a long
f¢'i4l1lf1q<";1t:t: . <:4Tif ,
;jf1'
<1m ~
"Rfu ~ ?
[King - Can this then be the fault of the heat, or (is it) as in my mind ?] (iii) In the same Way, Priyamvadathinks in the third act ofsakuntalam.
ad 'Avantisundari' who
. YlP:jq<";I-~, 'i'R'4' ~ ~~I'1lqj{'Ul:
tnta does not expose
~~I'
f ':\ ~ 3H"4I«if.;jfJ:t"d'k;4'ilfl~q,l- ~
Q4i"t!'l>'!
~1~"
I
[Priyamvad~-Anasoya, beginning fmrrrthe first sighi of that royal sage,
L·
sakuntala is as though uneasy. May it indeed be that this afflictions of hers is in his account !]
1V0uid be disclbsed.
(iv) In the 6th act oi Swapna the king says-
is the prcbabiliti~s of
fcf; '1T'i ~,
1
'l=fCI(lT
'''1''
'#
<:rPc;-. ~ I ~'.Q1:{q~d '!'~K't
'q
~ II
[0 destiny !It would have been said that you,have clone much if only you had kept the,princess alive, while yet, snatc~ing-.away the Kingdom)
..• ,-:
umours were to blot , their acts by the
.,
":.:.
(v) In the second act of UttaraRama. Rama,thQ,ks- . •
1
• • ,i~
•
.;,
"
. I
Wr-~ ~~t
L
I
..
.','
'
3lfq~'iill$l":i'i'\:)I::'" "'~
I"
'.. ,. .... [Rama (You) have done something betittiri'9 of Br&hmin might have come to lite ?1.' .'
mows the capability '.
R~'r;,a. Whether the son
..
, ~;.
TIC FUNCTION OF.....
THE PRAGMATIC FUNCTION OF...... .
"
123'
,"
.... -_.
-~'--'--.---
--------"-_._---_.-
(iii) Swampa. Act
(vi) Again in the second act of UttaraRama. Rama says.~ - ~IHISjI .
qf w:rr;:rq;'
~
•
ft whIT
.
~~iDlfll(1 I
1:fi!TR 'ifI'R
:wr
~-';f~
&l1"i11{lfOl I fit;~i1;
[YaugandharayaQc
I
(iv) Pratima, Act '
. [Rama -Alas !These are the same forests which were liked byVaidehi.
~ -~, ';f'
Wh'at could be more frightening than this ?]
[Sumantra-Prince,
If ~ comes with. potential, then it becomes conditional.
.(viij
This is the queen
Following sentence from sakuntalam Act I. is its illustration. ~ & l'SI
(v)
<miT {4 T-"1 Tll,il mtQ:
'j:ffif-~,
.
fcp ~ ?
. +r<:1 III (1 <Xl'i•
[Anasuya & Priyamvada - Dear sakuntala, if today father had been present here-
'9'
I
(vi) KarQa bhararr
I
The suggestions :
[Bharata : Mother blamed by me, whos(
I
sakuntala- What would happen then? ]
q;u-f:-';f .
The Passive form of the Potential is represented through its participles. Though, the passive verbal forms are found in grammar books, they are not found in the u.sage. The potential passive participle denotes. .
Pratima. Act
.
~ I
[KarQa-Don't be al too.]
~) the. request and the polite orders, (ii) the customs, the ·manners and the beliefs and (iii) the hypothetical meaning.
(vii) KarQabharam
The Potential Passive Participles are used inthe requests orthe polite orders. They are used in fonnal surroundings. Follciwing are some of the examples :
[salya - 0 King
(i) sakuntalam Act I . .
";f
. . ,':.,. ~••.~.
~ .
';f
£tc((q)'
~ I~
.
.
[Gha\otkacha- No
. '
Vaikhanasa • King !'ttiiS'is a deer of the hermitage (he) should not . be killed, shouldn6t'l:Je~{tled.1·
:;;:;~1ii,,,g~,,",, ~
seated .on , your seat, . (ix) Dota ,<3;ha\9t~ '.,
.i.¥j%
..
.
',; '. ':'-'
--.-,
'
..
:
.
"~:;~'.; . ."..~.
,."
'~:~&lW
'.. [Duryodhana - Oh
[Chamberlain·SaiDb!Ja$aka,please do not remove (them), do,not remove . ' . ","";r:;. • .:-i"I. . • . • ". (them)] <, t·;· , .,' ' : ' ,:,--
0
(viii) DOta Ghato\
.'.
~etl'H1: -~ ;m~
~~-~~, ';f
'"
. like -tl1i~ by iny word ,;.
, " "'.. ': . The p6iential pas~ ,. ·rna.~nEfrs and,beliefs. __ ,', "" .. ', '''. ,-c. ,,~,.-•..:..-:..:.--=:::---
,., . . ' ," T'HE PRAGMATIC FUN( '. ":/:124 . THE PRAGMATICF'UNCTION OF....... ;:,c.;... ':.. ::,.:;.,
....
.: . .:.; ~--------"--:.,:
--~-'----'~
_._-_.
'.'
... ;~.:::'.~ .:"
. .:.' .•..•' .,';,.,.'.," . '
.......'-
~
ima says-
(iii) Swampa. Act VI
~-;:r ~ ;:r ~ !'I ~ \C &I ~ I +!11
L
., ¢1'fI1{lfUl I [¢fl:!i1:
'>If7Rt
;rn&<1"l1 I
[YaugandharayaQa - (She) should not be entered. She is my sister.]
(iv) Pratima, Act VII
vere liked by Vaidehi.
~ -~, ;:r ~, ;:r ~, '1"i1&1~ I ~ ~~~II(1fl:i£l~ I comes conditional.
{Sumantra-Prince, no We are not to go here.
ustration.
This is the queen's quadrangle ! ]
(v)
r
i jay father had been
Pratima. Act VI
11«f-~, ~ ~~q ~(q'5l'i4>"1 11m ~~ ~ ~
. l'f1St flI \i &I 'i,
f
I
[Bharata : Mother! You must forgive me for everything that you were blamed by me, whose anger was roused by fraternal affection]. (vi) KarQa bharam.
¢U\:-.., ~ I !'I{:f\Gi ~ I 3'1"4G\\1 ~ I
,rough its participles. mar books, they are . :ipledenotes.
[KarQa-Don't be alarmed. be pleased, revered sir, listen to these others too.] .
stoms, the manners
(vii) Karl)abharam. ,
'.
. ~"("(i<E -~"l"fml,
~s orthe polite orders.
.., GIi1 &I ~, .., GI \i &I ~ I
[salya - 0 King of the Angas ! You should not give, you should not.]
Ie of the examples:
(viii) DQta Ghato\kacham. £Ic:1(¢"<1:~ .., .., I ~
'>I1\i&ll
;jj'1IG;f{N~1: I
[Gha\otkacha- No. No. You should listen't~,the message of Kri$Qa, being .. seated ,on your s e a t . j · § : ! "J:"'.~'~:~: .'
l.ge (he) should not
, . (ix)
D,?~a~:~a\Pt~acham.
.,. ' ..., ...
);>~"i
, ~i;~~~ R:lilIQl'iI'i&"
.
~
': ~'.~
.- ~. ";".:' ;:.".
t
...., . ::'. ":' .' '".
~~i#jf{:>.::<·
I" '~ '.
.. [Duryodhana - Oh ! Whom shouldbe'requslt.teCli'·tI~:should be informed
: hem), donotremove . .. . .''".
-", : :: ...::". ' . '
',,'
::·:~'>l;~f~~':>·'
.. likethis by my words]
,'. r'·. .
. •.
The pqtential passive participles are' used i~(I.~¢tations to show qustoms, .
~::~_::".' : . :. '~~nne'rs and.:beliefs. .
:. ',~'.
. ~"'
r:c~u~C~I~~OF.:.~.:.¥:~ '.L};,:"':'~HE PRAGMATIC FUNCTION OF.....125'~\~.~ " .~
.
._--'-'---~-...........;----.-".
..---.~-
.. -
If 1
,
(i) Pratima, Act I.
(viii) Swapha. Act 1\
~-f.i'Q\d,"" q~lql?1
~Clc;IRli/51 ~ ;or ~ qi/5 1T4>"4 I gWd&l'"i I
[King - Return (it) Pi . the presence of) witnes
[Avadatika - But, indeed, one should not laugh in solitude.] \
(ii) Pratima, Act II
There is a special
i/5iiCf>~I,",,: .~ ~+J: I ~\1mrr: Ti~~'t1srr: t
f
f~rf~H"'IRlS/il10n'Q: I
It always takes neuter . (i)
t
[Chamberlain-O misery! When even great persons of his type meet
I
[Charioteer - Long I . the moistened appearal
i·
~
[Rama- My dear Bharata, (son of Kaikeyi) ! A kingdom is such that should not be neglected even for a moment ! ]
(ii) Pratima, Act I. "Ul1: - ;or ~ I Wl:l
[Rama- That canno
(iv) KarQabharam ~
recently]
¥qu,. muIT
(iii) Swapna Act I.
,
[KarQa-A man should Pursue virtue alone.]
n'ftRft-
(v) sakuntalam Act I. ~~wr, Rl4'ld~~ol ~~ dqlct"1IR
';:fT'i"
I
must be a new comer.
(vi) sakuntalam Act I.
ancrt
qfbll(!'"i
(iv)
Pratima, P
"Ul1:-iR
fu
(v)
Swapna.
IAScetjc-Oh ! I se! (Vi) .
. <- . ......... ,
-: '...<. THE PRAGMATIC FUNCTION
OF:;:.;
~.'
.. ,"
",.
.' THE
. .·t·.··
"
.'
. ,", .....
."'
.'
.. ~~-~ ,~·;IJ
.'.
Swapna. , .
. 'l1$l'qI{t~\1'(4IC1f«HI"
~
. -'.'. -.;". . ".;
J
'l1tu'qI~-~ ~
[Friends -Who are we to dE;)tend? Cry 9utto DUf;lyanta.lndeed, Penance groves are t~ be protet;tecj py/he King]
------~.
~
[Rama - Then, ind
1>6Q""l1lst><'l
~~d&lIR dqlct"'lif.i ~ I
--. --- -------
'8~@R-<:
[Tapasi - This hermi
\
[King - Charitoeer, Penance "groves should, indeed be entered in a modest dress]
Th
~
311 'l>GI'I'j
~
U<1:-
q;uf-wrr fu
Pratima, Act III
"lJ(1:-
with such calamities, destiny cannot at all be overcome.] (iii) Pratima, Act IV.
L
... I-rt..I'(;I!4 ... I;
.
P~AGMATiC FUNCT
r
i I
(viii) Swapha. Act IV.
solitude.]
mrm
*llf~'1li'$Ql:m PI"'i\ct81ct6Q:
[King - Return (it) Padmavati, or the deposit should be returned, (in the presence of) witness]
,
,
There is a special usage of th~ root BhO in the hypothetical sehse.
It always takes neuter 1st singular.
~
of his type meet Ime.] IS
(i)
W-
i,
l'11 ,
,
gdom is such that
Pratima, Act III.
311<J>Ui<:\ {ilq{:ijgli41 'I~'1101IliPlW:
~ ~Rili6Q'i
NC'!
[Charioteer - Long lived sir, Ayodhya must be nearby on account of the moistened appearance of the trees.]
.
. (ii) Pratima, Act I.
-wr:-
-;:r
NC'!' I Il ('<0( UIl fq Ii 6Q 'i, I
[Rama - That cannot be. The ornaments must have been removed just recently] (iii) Swapna Act I.
~- 'fH"!';:';{~q\t
I
[Tapasi -This hermitage is full of ascetics I,\(ho are satisfied. This (one)
,
ld be entered in a
must be a new comer.]
1 I. Indeed, Penance
(iv)
Pratima, Act I.
-wr:-
m3<:;$01
[Rama - Then, indeed, there must be a good end of this.] Swapna. Act I.
(v)
ilIt:!i:II{-I-'l1CR"!
'.',
L
,!oliil?l '>lfqct6Q~ I
~ I 31Md'f(jqJtlilii '>lfq("{6Q'i, I ..
.[AScetic-Oh ! I see. An a~nima must be:nearpy.] '. . - . : ",;.. - . .. ",' . '-
'
. .
(vi)
Swapna. Act L
'>lfqct6Q'i, I (j(j'f(jd:f.>
"
....
_- ... -
..
"
.' THE PRAGMATIC FUNCTION OF.: ... .
:., .. ~-
'.-
.
>;:;ii;~;;?' -;.;"'::~--:':>~-: :~~it..':
......
__
;
. \.
ilIt:!illtl~;''f4lqkHI;jj'i";\1 q''8t1<:;f114tfiqAtl'~ ~'I . '.' ......... ~
: FUNCTION OF.. :.;
...
"i
~~-..~--,...-:---
----
..
127' ....
"---"""--""
--~.-
~-------~~-~-~---~~
,
---
I
[Ascetic - He had a wife named 'Vasavadatla', a daughter of the king of Avanti, who was very much loved by. Yaugandharayaoa - Might be. Then then, ? ] (vii)
The findings of the ~ chapter. As stated in the the reasons of the freq constructions. Even in constructions'are found The participial construct
Swapna. Act I
Q\\ii.(C1'1 - 4iiSt\1~Tm '
[PadmavaU - She must be kind by heart.] (viii) Swapna. Act V.
found more than the vel find out whether this tren!
-..~-
[King - Friend, she must not have come he.re.] (ix)
behind" it. The relation b have been examined fre
Swapna. Act V.
i.(i@G'i1i - R;
(1) The meaning (C
[Vasvadatla - Fo'rtunateIY, (she) breaths healthily. (she) must be out
(2) The structure (I
of disease.]
(3) The Discourse (
Conclusion
The difference of mea
Thus the active and the passive construction have different fields of usage. The Active construction is used in informal situations whereas the passive. construction is used in a formal one. The Passive construction is used by a subordinate as a mark of respect and by a superior as a matter of habit. The passive construction is used to signify the official status of the person, who uses it and also of those for whom it is used. The purpose of using the passive construction in communication is often to display respect, and thereby denoting a formal situation.
-. .:-:."
",
What is the differe constructions so far as is no difference of rile grammarians have alsl Both the constructions of presenting the sam! perspective rather than j the event and how he ' convey his ideas to the I The use of the Active motivation of the spe~ ~ • participa[lts (i.e. the A! . ~6're. According to S~ . 'result~~re the two i '~'6fth;e~~rit~j{de depen
~
-:.\
.
, ..
,. .
:-
....
c-",: -';
.. -.;~.~~.{: -",
-".-
";.
.: : ...'~.:
·.tW6 'a:~~ects: If the spe .~' ·:;·.~:;:.'j:.~~.~~·i:_;_:':
....
~; ':;6~~if}:i~J ;':', ,
'.
..
~
.
,., a daughter of the king
l !
e.]
"1
Rl (1 <:IF],
____..
The findings of the preceding chapters have been generalized in this chapter. As stated in the introduction, the goal of this sutdy is to find out the reasons of the frequent usages of the passive and the participial constructions. Even in'the morden Indian Languages, the passive constructions are found more in the past tense, and in the potential mood. The participial constructions of the past tense and the potential mood are found more than the verbal constructions. This study was undertaken to find out whether th.is trend has its origin in Sanskrit and what are the reasons behind it. The relation between the active 'and the passive constructions have been examined from the following three dimensions.
! m
I
CHAPTER-5 CONCLUSION _ __ _
I
(1) The meaning (Chap. II)
hi/yo (she) must be out
(2) The structure (Chap. III) (3) The Discourse context (Chap. IV) The difference of meaning
'lave different fields of ! lituations Whereas the 1 P . ! asslve construction , 'ld by a superior as a ignify the official status it is used. The purpose )n is often to display
,
:
What is the 'difference between the Active and the Passive type' of constructions so far as meaning. is concerned? The answer is that there is no difference of meaning in both the type of constructions. Sanskrit grammarians have also not mentioned any such difference of meaning. Both the constructions represent one and the same situation. The purpose of presenting the same event in different constructions emphasises the perspective rather than the difference of meaning. How the speaker cognises the event and how he wants to.represent it, makes him select the way to convey his ideas to the listener. This depends on the selection ofthe subject.
.
'"';',
...... ,
....•.
.
,".
'rI
: . ".'
..:. ';-.
-.-" ....
';.
.
. .:"',' :.;. :.~ }:.~:'
The use of the Active or thepa~~r~x c(lI1~!ru9tiOri ,depends upon the motivation of the speaker;,aridhidliiates:ad6· which 'of the two nuclear , ' participants (i.e. the Agent~ &f~;~;Bt;i~qt~)h:ew~ntstqemphasise . . " .'." .-'. . .:.. ,.-.-.-.. s.. . ~.""'..,..~,--.' , . . '." ," ".,.",. .- . more. According to SanskritgmmfJ'Taria\i.s; the Process..(~ and the .
,"
.
','-'..
'.
.
;';;,;.:\~,.~;.:,.~~-~.,
.
':.,
.
'.
';/":
::',,-:
.....
'result ~q.r~Jhe two aspects of th~~~tifi"ii$:i'(E;lC;Chp.I,~;Tfie c~nstruction" 'ot'the sei1leht'e depends upon the sp~aRer'~.~ iiesir.~f~;highlight one of the. i!.¢p:edis:lf the speaker wants to i:ii~ibb;~\:¥.iq(()aspect, the Agent
.twq
cJlfJ;~,~"·
",'"~~;.. ,:/. :-' ,
..
.
..
becomes .the subject and the active construction results. If he wants to
Number. One suffix had
focus the ('l?c'f) aspect, the affected object becomes the subject and the passive construction is uttered. Ofcourse, it is difficult to explain the greater usage of passive i3-t some stage in the development of a language with the help of this motivation principle. If a strong intrinsic reason is found out
person number suffixes were also considerably n active verb forms speak participles. This is evie . construction of the modE
from the discourse, then it can be said that the speaker has selected the subject for the definite reason. However, when no specific reason is found for giving predominance to 'l?c'f then we have to look tl) other facets for finding out the reasons for greater use of Passive. These facets are the structural complexities and the social usage of language.
participial construction. The discourse context
r
If we look to the soc
,
The constructiGlnal (Morphological) difference:
passive can be explainec " and colloquially Prakrit .
While examining the verbal morphology of the active and the passive constructions, a finding emerged, that the passive construction is simpler
royal courts, scholastic e
than the active.' Both adopt 5 constituents (chap.3), But the formative
were using Prakrit. Sans
constituten! in the Active construction is very complex. As the active
having higher social statl was being more and me largely been associatl atmosphere, therefore, t . of etiquette. The relatior
construction utlilises both the parasmai and the atmane padas, one requires to remember the different padas of the VRts. Over and above that, the allomotphs of the PN suffix of both the padas are required to be memorized, which are 72 in number. Moreover, there are no allomorphs of formative in " the passive. ·Instead" of that the pas"sive' Verb-form takes the
of Prakrit was increased
vice-sign/ya/. It is simpler in generative procedure than the formative. it
the use of a special type surroundings, greater u~
does not create any morphophonemic side-effect. Moreever, the passive
Active construction was I
construction only adopts the atmanepada and therefore one has not to
of the royal family, the employing passive con respective social station
memorize the different padas of the VRts. The af/omorphs of the PN suffix in passive is reduced from 72 to 36 only, which is conducive to simplicity. The passive participles reduce the complexity further. Mea~ingwise, there is no difference in verbal or participial forms which is conducive to simpler participial constructions. Thishasoincreased}heuse of Participial forms and has continunedtill today in the lTlorden lriQian languages. In the history of the language, from vedic times to modern times, ttJere appears tob~a,.trerid of achieving siril:plicity from morphosyntactic ·cpmplexity. The·~-e;rbal conjugatr&nsigriSc, number, vowelendingYforCfs, etc .
. - have gradually disabpElared.Th~ !r~6s[tlon from vedic to classic~1 was marked by the
.
San~kdt r~~~ctibn))1.t~~suffixes of Tense/Mood~i;t9persori/' ':.~,
. ,J~~:~:~" :;. ,' :~i; "';
..
130
"!
•
.?" ~ : .
CoricltiS·i"O~·-
of the Active & the Pass upper strata, if the relatie nature, the language use of passive construction. lowersirata and if the re One salient feature imperative (sec chA.) 'Je
ina~~otherHi~guage. n above'mentioned differe . . . . . . '. ' .. ,
lsults. If he wants to
Number. One suffix had many allomorphs.ln Modem Inslian Languages the
) the subject and the to explain the greater If a language with the
person number suffixes are separated. The allomorphs of Tense & Mood were also considerably redu(.3d. Therefore, it is clear that instead of complex active verb forms speakers selected less complex passive verb-forms and
reason is found out ker has selected the lcific reason is found ~
to other facets for -hese facets are the Jage.
'
'
II I
participles. This is evident in the past passive-participles. The verbal construction of the modem Indian languages find their roots in the Sanskrit participial construction. The discourse context:
r
If we look to the social aspect of the language, the greater use of the passive can be explained. Sanskrit has remained a language forthe literature and colloquially p'rakrit was used. It was used only in the proceedings of
!tive and the passive
royal courts, scholastic debates and as a language of the sastras. The use
nstruction is simpler
of Prakrit was increased. The Ladies'and the persons from the lower strata
I, But the formative plex. As the active
were using Prakrit. Sanskrit remained only a formal language. The persons having higher social status only were using Sanskrit. So passive construction was being more and more used. The theme of the Sanskrit literature has largely been associated with the royal personage, and sages. The atmosphere, therefore, becomes formal. The characters use the language of etiquetie. The relatioris and the' Social status of the Gharacters lead to
. padas, one requires 9.nd above that, the ed to be memorized, )rphs of. formative in b-form takes the I"~
Ian the formative. It I. ! >reever; the passive
~
I
1·
'ore one has not to phs of the PN suffix , ducive to simplicity. Meaningwise, there onducive to simpler of Participial forms guages. , 10dem times, there morphosYntactic llendingwords, etc , ) classical San~kdt
1
1I100d ai:n:fpersori/· . :'
:
COri'clusi'on
c,,:'
the u'seof a special type of language. As Sanskrit was being used in official surroundings, greater use of the passive construction came in vogue. The Active construction was being used more by the commoners. The Members of the royal family, the sages and the Ministers are often found to be employing passive constructions even in the informal situations. The respective socia! stations of the characters is a vital force behind the use of the Active & the Passive constructions. If the characters belong to the upper strata, if the re[Sltions betweeri the two characters were of an official nature, the language used wa; more refined and that led to the greater use ,of passive construction. On the oth,er ha~d, :~the characters w~re from a lowersirata and if the relations we'reinforrnal, the active was preferred. ' ".. '~."
One salient feature of Sanskrit'language is the use ;of the Passive, imperative (sec. chA.) Very rarely, if ev,e!'r, :su:Chconstruct.!p~:l~ to be found,
ina~yottierlanguage. The passive Impehi.tLveyery cle~dy emphasises .tlie .,'
..
..
.
".
. . ' . -.-
.'~'
,'4
above'mentioned difference in the status'. bIllie speaker and the listener. , ... ~ '-.' '. .",/'f " . ':.:/}:;: , Conclusion
131
.
, . The use of the Active Imperative & the Passive Imperative relates to the social statuses of the character. Sanskrit was the language of the scriptures. In the scriptures the Agent is never specifie(;L The Generic constructions become more apt as the scriptures only propound generally accepted truths, and issue mandates.
The list of drama' Pratimana\akam,
Under such circumstances, the Agent looses its significance and the object and the action becomes more important. Thus, the Passive and the
Males
~
impersonal constructions are selected. Therefore, in the potential mood the passive construction becomes preponderent (sec. chp. 4) Therefore, in
'l) i";!
r
Sanskrit, the potential participles are always found in the passive voice.
Ul'1:
The agents in such construction is .either undisclosed or passive.
('f~
u;;rr
Thus, the greater use of the passive and the participial constructions in Sanskrit is due to the twin reasons of structural simplicity and the sophisticated atmosphere. This study explores a special angle in comprehending the sentence construction of Sanskrit language. Moreover it examines certain universal aspects of Sanskrit language in relation to the language, universals. The Sanskrit language keeps pace with the principles of language universals in the selection of the subject. Th~ above stated social interaction isa'peculiar
w . ~q"i'R1'l):.
.,
I
feature of Sanskrit language. This study definiteJygives a new view point in the examination of the linguistic history of Sanskrit and the Modem Indian
'lJ1l"T[':
'i'i< til q {fl
\'r
Languages.
t1'T'!W
It is important to know the attitude of the speaker while studying the history of a language. This thesis aims at discussing such attitudes. Such
'1K('1'l):
attitudes, pointing to some definite qirec:;tion can be known if a comparative study of the, illustrations of Prakrit, Pi:jli and Apabhransa were to be studied.
Females
~11"'1:
ora
From this study it can be said that,td~psLi'edb.: Passive constructions which ..' are.obtained in modem IndianLi:ihglJages have their roots in the attitude of •
,0-"
:.'
........
:.
.
-
•• _'
",'
,".
.
~ ~<
..-: .....,~
" ; .
.
..<.::" :.,:' ;';'.,-" ':
}~;;o~,,< ....~' ;. : ~.:;. : .'~.' , ;';:~~/ .•.
".:~
., ".-.'.{'
••
.'. . ..•.
.
. . ::,!.: . ...' '.'..••.::.. v
132
.~.:
31C1cUTil I .'~.
' •••.
the. speakers of the Sanskrit la~gli.i:\ge; Theref9re, this study cal;1,fofmah " " ", importantlrhkin the overall s~udY:G(lndO,,Ar.yan languages. ' ':; .' ," :- :"
\1 Tilt,; I\:1
.-~~
.. -.'iltt<..
.'r '.,
::·:·ii~11. ':?<
0";'::';,/f:" ". . ,.' .;'
.~.
.
:-.
":.:...:
.' ..,
..
','
.'.-.
.-;:. ..'. :" . .:.>" .":.::',::;.)
"
CO'ntl'uSil1n :,c'..., .'
-.
. . ""
",
~"
•....
.
.q)'j {Mi :
'
'.
'
..
. .:::.,-
.. ,' "
.
-,~
..
lerative relates to the
APPENDIX e scriptures the Agent )me more apt as the and issue mandates.
Males the Manager the Chamberlain
in the passive voice. ed or passive.
The prince, the hero
rticipial constructions
The King Dasaratha
the King's younger brother
T-
al simplicity and the
lending the sentence ines certain universal luage universals. The mguage uRiversals in I'"~ lteraction is a peculiar !
-
i
:er while studying the'" I', I such attitudes. Such;',',
!,_
sa were to be studied. 9 constructions which
'l1C:
- Warrior
m
- Rama's younger brother
~ ~
Charioteer
~ q 1M
The keeper of statue-house.
-uqur:
The king of Lanka.
'lO%< ct Iq ~:fl
- Two old ascetics
{(Nf!:
- An ascetic
KC'l
~
A servant in hermitage - Rama's younger brother -'theVoJjfeof the Manager the D6or;Keeper
;,:t~c; Im
...
",
!
."
Servants
!>1m i!>1 {\
.
.'
~
Females
guages.
:'.-
The charioter of Dasaratha
~~
roots in the attitude of ' lis study can:forrnar! ' '
WRI:
<1
l
lown if a comparative
..
I
Pratimana\akam.
:he potential mood the chp. 4) Therefore, in
':.'
.
The list of dramatis personea.
ficance and the object the Passive and the
Yes a. new view point r; lnd the Modem Indian
;
, .',
~
.. .
-.;
,.-;_ ::~l'-.'. ',,qij{4C"'11
.. '.'
;:: , '':''.~
---------_."'--'-~"'.:.:- -':'.--.~-.-
a maid servant a maid servant - female ascetic
Superhuman CI
~~br: ~
~m,:>t+r , ,
Swapna Vasavadattam
qfj'l1 c; '1>1
;
Males:
I;
~ ~
- the Servants .
~
- Minister
l'4 :
- Chamberlain
Males
§I (\j'q I{\:
- a disciple
~ ~
the Manager
Ri~q
~
l'Ri"s: Dutagha\otkach
the king's friend
mrr
- the king, the hero
l'4 :
- the Chamberlain of Mahasena
'j:jC:
~ ~~m:G1:
Females: q I@c;'dl
~~.
the queen-the heroine the maid - a hermit
'
"1el«fl'q:
Females
lTRffit
the Princess and the Queen a Servant - a Servant
qffi
'
!ARigl{\ qffi
~~K'lT
!ARigl{\
a Servant
KarQabharam
a Servant
Male
- the doorkeeper
~
- a servant of Mahasena.
'j:jC:
"
q;uf:
OOtavakyam
~
- th~king . '
..
~
~
...
.. ~~
ql'1~q: ~~m:G1:
~
--
~TW:
:riUl)'odhana's friend
.~
bUTyodpana'sfriend
MadhyamavyaJ
·-the.G~i:lnd-un~lf:) of ttie king
...... ~.
..:.
~~
the Chamberlain
··Males
-'. the Materna(uncle of the King .. . , ' : ' .. ~",' .:<. :' ,.".. . . ,,/ LOFcf..Kt9 1:i iii the messenger' ....:-< ...
:" .
' .. ,.
~/ \h~ Jc;unger brqth~r of ttieKinQ"<,.\:
:;C'
,~\'~i; ;i~
the ;ather of the King
:'~>"'\~'i~;:'134 '.~
~.~
.
.... .
'.'
:.~'
'. ...:: ;':;'\i; <"\1'4 :
.».
.
:
:ipPENDIX
.
".:
'",-
/". APPEN'rilx
... .
","
,
•... '.
i
Superhuman Characters ~~R:
the Discus of Vasudeva
~~~
the Bow of Vasudeva the Mace of Vasudeva
~
~
- the Conch of Vasudeva - the Sword of Vasudeva
'Ris:
- Eagle, 'the carrier of Vasudeva
Dutagha\otkacham
Males
r
~ ,!(HI«;<:
- The Manager - The father of Duryodhana a Servant the King King's younger brother
~
~
vlahasena
'r~TRl'1:
~r
Ie
- King's maternal uncle
1
"-l c: (iOli'iQ:
The messenger, son of BhIma and Hi<;limba
Females 3
1lT'tnft
Queen
q::~Tffi
SlRigl{1
I
- the King's mother - the King's. sister the Doorkeeper
Kan)abharam
l
Male ~
The Manager The servant
~
The king of Anga Pradesa, the hero
~
mao
I
I
~~
-'-
~TW:
. The King -The devine personality, the king of Gods
~q'i(1:
. -'Jhedeyine messenger Madl")yamavyayoga' . . .' .' Males .. '
he king'
~.~
)f the King .. ;enger'·'··: ,'.,.• '.: . ",' of the King ......... . g
.. ,' . 'APPENDIX
.}
.... . W-fl'[:""
... ',;
.'..
t9~"elde~{o;on of Bra~[r(ih .... the' S6m)np.<son of Eir.ahmin
.'
..
:
".
:~;. ':l~lr~
"
'··".APPENDIX
APPENDIX ".
: ~:.
- - _..._--,_._ ...
q:
the Youngest son of Brahmin
€je;lNi'
the son of BhTma & Hic;limba
'lon "1 :il '1 :
BhTma
~ Females
!)I1i.U°n
. ~fu~1
,
~'1:
.the Manager
i
'!i,"lC'lI
I
~ ~ ~ c.
- the Wife of Brahmin - . the Wife of BhTma
r
Urubhangam
'l>lo~'ll:
Males
'liCI:
the Bards
iilC'l~q: .~
~
.~
~
Males
the father of the king the son of the king
~ ;o:r~
~ Abhiji'ian sakun'
Duryodhana's guru in gadayuddha . the king-the hero. , ~.
"1IGOQ :
- the son of Guru DrolJa the Manager
,i4<;"1'1:
Ul "1{lct:
- the Assistant
~ c.
Females
cllctl'll'1:
~
the King's mother
~
~.
the Queens of the king
~ctIMq?j
Pancharatram .
~'!ffi'1:
Males
~ ~
~
the grand father of the King
IDur:
- the guru of Duryodhana etc.
q;uf: ~T
~,~
- the King
,•.
Duryodhana's friend, king of Anga - Duryodhana'l:! maternal uncle
.'~ 't1HIC'I'!l:
'", t1 fl:1 'I i:.:-;.. .. "'J,',_
Females
D0ry9Clha[la;~(;ervant .. '..... -::
'~.'
':.
'.
~1,!,
~'.
tfreqhlefOf th~ Shephards -)gshep~erd'" ,', - ',4he !i;;'
.~} m
!."
kingVir~\~: .-: - ':'. :,; ..
. {l['1"1dl
"':~.
. ~"('Yudhi$ hfhir.a··
..4'!f.ShTm:;i;·:; ,
~".
...
.
., "".'
.
. .
'.~;':'
'
:,.,;.
",
136
..
;_.
----..:.~:::.-.
----
.
.
lrahmiri - Arjuna - Arjuna the Son of Arjuna the Son of Virata
~i9imba
"!Ot'>'>i (Y\ 1
,
~
t
I,
:r'if{;
- Charioteer
W
!filo~'Q:
Viraia's SerVent - Viraia's serVant
~(f:'
,gadayuddha.
'I'lG: -
Viraia's servant
~ Abhijiian sakuntaiam
'the Manager
Males
The hero, the king
a
'1IG<4:
- the VidO$aka
{44<;; '1 '"I:
- the King's son
{1I'"Hlct:
- the Purohit, Priest -, the Charioteer
q Ict 1'Q '1.:
- Chamberlain the Door Keeper
~ ,Ig
- the Bards the Chief of the city police
act IM
two of his police constables
~"~
- the queen-moth~r's messenger
~
eKing
Indra's charioteer
'1lctM:
na etc.
q;r~<[q;
the Chief of the Hermits, foster father of
(q;uq:)
::sakuntala
II uncle
.......
Females
- The'h$rcilJ.ie ... ,'. '.> '. . ...:.,
'!' 'fI (Y\ 1
~1
'~} fS1ti b<;; 1
hards
,. {l l'j;'1ctl
~ ,~. ,< -
",
:;:: .
: .
:' .
"
-'.
-;,iPP.ENDIX . ':
,"
.:~.'
'.
(The Foster daugh\er cof Kaova) , . ;
".
'-,
;,' ~ .:ihei: frien~S . . . .~;.,
• j,-
•• "';:-.
: '-. 'tier
apsar~_Sfriend
" "::-:'the: elderly;f;natron . ',- .' :'".' ~
,c:,";
~.
. ;-
.
;:.
";;~~~,
...:.;.,::\'.;::(
..
.
::,,"i:\:"".~,::
the-· ,Keep'e(~pf DU$ya n\p0!.ltgarden :~~; ~. ~:: ~~~,',->' . -:;";..
"'." ,-
.:"~'-'
~.)
.
~
. ..
~"
,'
~
¥\"l:1
the King's maid
r
Females
oq I
the King's maid
I
1.flm
~
- the King's forest attendants
I'IRt i; I {)
- the Door keeper
I'IRti;I{)
I
~
'-
'l({l'<11
I
~
the Wife of Marich
~
the Wife of Sotradh~r
(!l1"ffi
Uttararamacharitam
~ ;m;~
Males
qjj fI <"'4 I
~
Nmmr
The manager
"'lC:
- The manager and his assistants
- The
1<>-~;q: .
~
Mcchhkatikam
king~
.~
I
Csi of 8usyascnga's asrama ~~.+fUI:
the King's younger brother
~
The servant
~ <;q 'i't>'f:
The sudra devotee sambuka after his death
:}
Males
i
the Chamberlain
'"
"-I"f{)~
Rl'l"!Ct>:
Pcrc:: ~l'l5lT:
W:.
Two disciples of ValmikT
11T~
~
Father of STta'
~
the servant; the chamberlain of Kausalya
~ {1'lI<;:,
.
u\'i{:
the son of Rarna and the disciple ofValmikT ~
Official of Chandraketu's army
oq~ih
th~ s()n of Laksmaoa
wP'f
the Charioteer of Chandraketu
,!,~I:
..
"
.
-'. the.S.upe'rhurpan character
'l1Ra1Rn:
-·'The composer '. . ',-.; of Ramayaoa
<m:
~~W:
3Wfq;: .
"f .•
lQ't.Ut..I."':
~.' .'
~ ~l i;~~ <1: ,
.L
- .the. Son of .Rama, ValmikT's disciple
'''--~
"
W: ~ Ifil C'I :
- the disciples
~'f:
qw
) ( The manager pf the Play
~~W: ~ oq «; 'Ii:
..' (GOing;'t6 'play in the last act)
m~1T
r.
: ~",
"; .
. ,..... <•••••
.
,', -
'-,
...~
;".
138 '":, .
----"-------_ ...
'.
:~, - -
,";
..
Females
ndants
<.:ftcrr
The queen
!>IRigliJ
The doorkeeper
~
the disciple of ValmikT Vanadevata - River goddess' River goddess the wife of rshi Vasi$tha the King's mother
l
- the Superhuman character - the Superhumans
assistants Mrchhkatikam Males
1,
- the Manager a Brahmin-the hero
~
!
'"
'
other
nbuka after his death
- the Vidiisaka the Citizen the King's relative the King's relative - the King's relative
~T
~.
ikT
~ 'l('1'1i{:
~IFctC1'1i:
- A thief, Madanika's lover
{iClI<:;'Ii:, ~
berlain of Kausalya
'liU\'lN':
1e disciple ofValmikT
I
J
:u's army
~
the King's rela:tive tlie Citizens 'a Servant - a Servant Bastards
~
{1 g{~ 'i:,
<m'P:
ldraketu
~~~
ImikT's disciple
~
iCter
'lay.
~~~ ~ 'q;;:; 'Ii:
last.a,ct)
m~t
Ii\yaoa ..
. the Son of Charudatta A Serviq;nt ;. -.
.
:eo . ~
..
"
acftizeo.
~,il:serVanf c
.citizens .f'
":aBauddh~.ascetic -,
. .'
.- ..~
:. . .
:', '.=
. .
....
.A.'...
.
,'
.... ,.
"
";: ".
.'. ::;~~-.
....•.
"."
~~
a citizen
31fu'l> I '(\'0 1'1>:
the Judge
s;MT
,,f I
I'
- a citizen
~
a citize(l
'qIO"!IC'il
servants
Apte Vs.
Females:
_;:ra qfj",Hl '11 '(c;Pi 'I> I '1 c;Pi 'I> I
BhaUa VM - the Wife of SCitradhara a danseuse - the heroine BrownE,K. & Miller
a maid at CharudaUa's house
c
- a maid at Vasantasena's house
~
a maid servant at Vasantasena's house CharudaUa's wife
Brown Gillian & Yule
Vasantsena's mother
Chaffe Wallance L.
Cole Peter & Sadocl
• Dik Simon C.
Dviwedi Kapildev
Gonda James ..
'
"
Iyyer Subramania K.
~
.":' ~:~"-
.:-,,-.! .•:,.
··.l_
~~'" 0·-
'.i..:
.
';~r
!
~;' : :::~,-: '-~;:• l. ',' '.
JOShiS.'D.-Ili"~Rqodbe
'-:.
.......
·(7.~.
- ".]I.
;."
~
.:..
-JOshi-S.D:'&J;:ioodbeQ
",
«.
"",
. ,:'
....
l/
",'
-,
"
.
-..).~ ..,:.
(.
.' . "
I
BIBLIOGRAPHY Apte Vs.
"Student's Guide to Sanskrit Composition' Bombay 1937.
Bhatta VM
'Karaka Prakarar)am'
Ira
(Sanaskrit Pustak Bhandar, Ahmedabad -1984)
roine a's house na'shouse lsantasena's house
BrownE.K. & Miller J.E. 'Syntax-A linguisitc introduction to Sentence structure' Hutchison 1980 Brown Gillian & Yule George - 'Discourse Analysis'. Cambridge University Press .1983 Chaffe Wallance L.
'Meaning and structure of language' The University of Chicago Press 1970
Cole Peter & Sadock Jerrold H.
'Syntax & Sementics' Vol.8
(Grammati.cal relatipns) (Academic Press Inc 1977) Dik Simon C.
'Functional Grammar' North-Holland Linguistic Press 1978
Dviwedi Kapildev
'Praw;lha-rachananuvada kaumudi' Vishwavidyalaya Prakashan, Varal)asi, 1969
Gonda James
'Remarks o~the Sanskrit passive'
Iyyer Subramania K.A.. 'Bhartrhari' 'Peccan College Building c(,ntenary ':." ::. '. '<;':-' ," . '; &··Silver"Jubilee series-68. 1969" .;i: : . :.... ~ _.~.
;.,:: .
.
.... ,
-:.
;..:"
......
'1'
. <.~.
JoshiS.O:' &':Roodberger{ J.A·;F.'~·~Ny.~karal)a Mahabha$ya' . . '(An?bilihitahhnika) Poona Universify Press 1976..•.. ' . "
~
i. .'.:':. JOShi.s.D:&BOOdber,g~'rt:j·~'8;;:~yakara~a Mahabha$YireJarakahnika) ..•.. . l
. r..
Poonci;~l:1.t\hrersit0;press,
'. "
"'~;:, ..••""l...,_. ~_·~_.;B. ,.:L :. ,~0z.~G:. _RA~"P_H_.~ . .•
.. .
141 _ _ _ _ _ __
,,'.
;;:<~
. ~,;:.
.... .
".".'
. - , .'
Joshi S.D. & Roodbergen J.A.F.
'VyakaraQa Mahabhasya' (Pratipadikartha se:;;ahnika, Poona University Press 1981)
Joshi S.D: & Roodbergen J.AF.
'VyakaraQa
Rosenberg Sheldon
Mahabhasya'
Shastri kapildev
(Samarthahnika) Poona University"Press 1968 i\
Joshi S.D. & Roodbergen J.A.F.
'VyakaraQa Mahabhasya' (Vibhaktyahnika) Poona University Press 1980
Kimball John P.
'I
Ii
Shukla J.M.
'Syntax & Semantics' Vol. 4 Academic Press, New Yourk 1975
Levinson Stephen C.
Shukla J.M.
'Pragmatics'
Li Charles N.
'Subject and Topic'
\ \
Academic Press, Inc. New York 1976 Longacre Robert E.
Siewierska Anna
, 'The Grammar of Discourse' Plenum Press, New "
Lyons John
Shibatani Masayoshi
.,
Cambridge University Press, 1983.
Yor~.
19(33.
Stein Gabriele'
'Semantics' VoLl Cambridge University Press 1977.
Timothy Shopen
Ogden C.K. & Richards I.A. 'The meaning of meaning' Lund Humphries-London. Palsule .Gajanan Balkrishna
'The Sanskrit Dhatupa!has' Poona
.
University' Press 1961
Trivedi Kamalashanl
I'
Platt John J.
'Grammalical.formand Grammatical meaning.' . . '
·Vasu S.C.
North. ~olland PubHshing Co. 1971 Robins R.H.'" Robins R.H. ","
.
'A ShQ;t-h&tory"of . .
Ii~kuistics' Longman-1967,._.,.;.':
'General LingUi.s.ti&~ATi introductory surVeY'( Long!J1en 198Q,,' ' .. ..~.
. "YV.hitneryWilliam D..
' .
~t·
..~~~:
..)..
'".
~~.,
:.:~.
,
" .~.. , .:...·.'1
."r· BIBLlOGllAPHY
BIBLIOGRAPHY'
142
.
... ...•.
"
. :""
"', :.
:'. ~ .:
, . ,. -----~.. ---+----------:::::-:7.:=. --".~:....,;'. '.;"'
"
-.;"
, .
.......
Mahabha$ya' Poona University
Rosenberg Sheldon
'Sentence Production' Lawerence Erlbaum Associates, Publishers Hillsdale, New.Jersy"77
Mahabha$ya' ersity"Press 1968
Shastri kapildev
'Vaiyakarana Siddhanta ParamalaghuManju$a' Kurukshetra University Publication 1.975.
Mahabha$ya' ersity Press 1980
Shukla J.M.
'VakyapadTyakara Bhartrhari' Swadhyaya' Yr.3 No.2
I\cademic Press, Shukla J.M .
.,
'VakyapadTya' L.D. Institute of Indology Ahmedabad-9 (1984)
Shibatani Masayoshi
1983.
'Syntax and semantics' Vol. 6 (The graminar of
.~
Causative constructions) \
(Academi 'Press, Inc. New York 1976)
lrk 1976 Siewierska Anna
'The passive-A comprative Linguistic Analysis', Croom Helm 1984
Stein Gabriele
'Studies in the function of Passive'
anum Press, New
GunterNarrVerlang-Tubingen 1979 977. 'Language Typology and Syntactic
Timothy Shopen I neaning' Lund
Description' (Clause structure) - 'Chambridge University Piess-1985
Ipathas' Poona
Trivedi Kamalashanker P.
7·; latical meaning.'
·Vasu S.C.
1971
'Sanskrit Shikshika ·191.
'Siddhanta.Kaurptidi'V01 .1 Motilaf Ban'arasidas, Varanasi. 1986 '.
Longman-1967 ,..
d . .' ~
. : ~.,
luctory survey'.: ~r
. ,,\l'J.hitneryWiliiam D. ,,' .." -.;'
:'.-
"
'sanSkritG;a~:tna·r'. ,:.:
.
'-,,".
M'bli,taf'e,anarasidas Banarasidas,Varanasi, 4 .'
.
.... ,
1952.
...
..
.~..
"
.
n-
J;;. '.1.'.1:".
BIBLIOGRAPH;r
·"·:::B:::IB+'i.:-:IO:-:G:::R..,.A'"'P..,.HY..,..--------1-4-3----'·~--~.. - - - - - - ' - -
.,;'. "~
•
. ",.t
:, -.;,~
).
._ _ _._J:'......,__ ~_~..__ ,. ____ -____. '._ ..
The List of Classics (from which data is collected) : . Bhasa 1.
'Swapnavasavadattam'
Devadhar C.R. 1957.
2.
'Pratima-natakam'
Devadhar C.R. 1957.
3.
'Dotaghatotkacham
Devadhar C.R. 1957.
4.
'DOtavakyam
Saksena R. 1955
5:
'Kan:mbharam'
Devadhar C.R. 1957. ,
6.
'Madhyama Vyayoga'
Devdhar C.R 1957.
7.
'Urubhangama'
Devadhar C.R. 1957.
8.
'Pancharatram'
Devadhar C.R. 1957.
Kalidas 1.
'Abhijilan sakuntalam' Gajendragadkar A.B. 1962.
BhavalihOti 1.
'Uttararamacharitam'
"Joshi Umashankar 1950
5udraka ' 1.'Mrechakatikam'
Karmarkar R.D.
. ,,_. i
;1'~i y.:
.'
:r"·-· ..
:,~
•
..
;,-., '